Home

2014 Jeep Wrangler (includes Unlimited) Owner`s Manual

1. Power Windows If Equipped 44 Mi ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 99 Wind Buffeting iic ado p atone Tae 47 M SAFETY TIPS 12des oti REGERE ES S 100 E REAR SWING GATE 24er eae cea ees es 47 Transporting Passengers esas een 100 rum ll OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 48 Exhaust Gas cs cvsvaae ts Rx whee 100 Important Safety Precautions 48 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Seat Belt Systems c0ssccceeeeeeeees 50 Vehicle icis be ER ire Pas 101 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 64 neuer bei ia ii bo nd mE 104 Child Restraints 45 orb ERE 76 Transporting Pets eitera raa 0 0 0 0 0 ee 99 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehiclehas 1 Place the gear selector in PARK if equipped with an the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These automatic transmission numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder 021340825 Vehicle Key With RKE Transmitter THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always shift the au
2. Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before you see or hear steam coming from under the hood tightening do not open the hood until the radiator has had time i to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles 570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be nut bolt has been tightened twice sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571 WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack WARNING Continued Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING where it can be raised on a lift WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
3. INDEX 682 INDEX MM About Your Brakes ise eem red 481 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 623 Adding Fuel 2 22 2 id asrda pe ees 541 Additives Fuel 0 0 0 0 00 0c eee eee 539 Air B g sedere tersedar mteaa e Ene ww edes 64 Advance Front Air Bag 6 llle 66 Air Bag Operation 4 sss ees e s eee ad 67 Air Bag Warning Light 0 72 Enhanced Accident Response 72 Event Data Recorder EDR 75 Front Alt Bag gnc on eem Hemd sce 64 If A Deployment Occurs 0000 70 Knee Impact Bolsters 0004 68 Maintaining Your Air Bag System 74 Air Bag Deployment llis sess 64 Air Bag Light 5 2 Lssed ewe epe eas 72 102 318 Air Bag Maintenance llle 74 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 600 Air Conditioner Maintenance 4 607 Air Conditioning i e esr uem dee ans wed 415 Air Conditioning Controls llle 415 Air Conditioning Filter 426 608 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 425 427 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 607 608 Air Conditioning System 415 419 607 Air Pressure Tires ee 512 Alarm Security Alarm 0 20 320 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio sss 381 401 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 622 656 Disposal sat ee
4. Recommended Cold Tire Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on Inflation Pressure the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 506 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door E J Fa 054901778 Example Tire Placard Location Door Example Tire Placard Location B Pillar STARTING AND OPERATING 507 Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FR THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR D CARGO SHOULD ia P19570R14 T12s 70015 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 ORIGINAL TIRE SIZI COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 508 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The
5. m E R CT lt gt S OPERATING INFORMATION Wrangler 2016 OL FEE H i a Mt dea E i AMET pp Jeep P VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manu factured
6. 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 0226075266 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front
7. 91 Infants And Child Restraints 79 Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint 90 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belte cedat gona Peu am Pa eens ae Rates 92 Locating The LATCH Anchorages 87 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 83 Older Children And Child Restraints 79 Seating Positions i cse rm et eem 82 Child Safety Locks eese ns 42 Clean Air Gasoline llle 537 Cleaning Wheels sueaceeRu ond Seabee vec ED E 636 Climate Control 2 0 0 0 ee 415 ClO qe ad ak oe eS eee EE 359 368 385 Cold Weather Operation e secese cesses mastas 435 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 412 en INDEX 685 Compact Spare Tite ask ide cae eae te 518 Comp sS ae nat ow ara RUE BU aah es 336 339 346 Compass Calibration 000 339 347 Compass Variance isa sapea rateom eee eee 338 348 Computer Trip Travel llle 345 Connector UCI pedis eer RE kee Du aged 404 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 404 Console ere YR RR HE Ne EE ames 191 Console Floor llle 191 Contract Services uses om bez nd 673 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 624 Cooling System s eaea starea eiaa a e 621 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 0 0 623 Coolant Capacity 6 6 0 2 eee eee 656 Coolant Level 0 2 ee eee eee 625 Disposal Of Used Coolant 0 625 Drain Flush And Re
8. e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to LOCK Positive Battery Post 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the ee parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Connecting The Jumper Cables could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle Jump Starting Procedure 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper WARNING cable to the positive
9. Temperature Grades 0000 678 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 671 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and ar
10. 036067913 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 15 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate 16 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear at the lower left corner of the rear window opening window The spongy part of the seal should be down Ensure that the zippers are properly started and and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate aligned before zipping to prevent damage when closed 036033904 036201721 17 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 18 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets d 036033903 20 Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel E 0359041470 19 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289 21 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS IF their secured position EQUIPPED CAUTION Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of t
11. For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform ing the following steps Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then push and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Release both buttons at the same time Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by pushing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve hicle Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps NOTE Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve hicle Security Alarm To Lock The Doors And Swing
12. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 0226072909 Four Door Models e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor e Zi Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 0226072908 Two Door Models 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se What is the weight limit child s weight Weight limit Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to weight of the child restraint for using the of the Child seat belt to install a forward facing child Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a Restraint restraint up to the recommended weight limit forward facing child restraint of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and back of the front passenger seat the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Yes 2 Door Head restraints cannot be removed in the Model only 4 Door model Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor better fit If the rear seat can
13. These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you NOTE commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate UCONNECT 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF Uconnect Supplement Manual for external USB device EQUIPPED support capability Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for detailed Connecting an electronic audio device to the AUX port operating instructions located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the control feature to control the connected Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped device Refer to Voice Command for further details Connecting An External USB Device Use a connection cable to connect an external USB device to the vehicles USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details Center Console USB AUX Connector Port Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicles USB MP3 control system external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pushing radio switches as described below UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405 NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connecte
14. e You can also push the Voice Command button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones Push the Phone Xe button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 You can also push the Voice Command button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features push the Phone amp button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode push and hold the Voice Command t amp v button for five seconds until the session begins or e Push the Voice Command button and say the Voice Training System Training
15. e Vehicle modifications or failure to properly main tain your vehicle may change the handling charac teristics of your vehicle and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system Changes to the steering system suspension braking system tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance Improperly inflated and un evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor mance Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The ESC system has three available operating modes in 4H range The system has one operating mode in 4L range Two wheel drive vehicles and four wheel drive vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes 4H Range 4WD Models ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H range ESC Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF switch When in ESC Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily push the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of oper
16. AWD 3 6L 3 73 Two Door 8 400 Ibs 25 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Sport Model 3 810 kg 2 32 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg E STARTING AND OPERATING 551 Model 4WD Eust GCWR Gross Frontal Max GTW Max Trailer Tran un i Axle Model Combined Wt Atea Gross Trailer Tongue Wt PARS Rating Wt See Note 3 6L Manual 3 21 Two Door 7 000 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Sahara Model 3 175 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 91 kg AWD 3 6L Manual 3 73 Two Door 8 500 Ibs 25 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Sahara Model 3 856 kg 2 32 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg AWD 3 6L 3 21 Two Door 7 000 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Automatic Sahara Model 3 175 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 91 kg AWD 3 6L 3 73 Two Door 8 500 Ibs 25 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Sahara Model 3 856 kg 2 32 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg AWD 3 6L Manual 4 10 Two Door 8 600 Ibs 25 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Rubicon 3 900 kg 2 32 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg 552 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Eneite GCWR Gross Frontal Max GTW Max Trailer Tran ae Axle Model Combined Wt Area Gross Trailer Tongue Wt S Rating Wt See Note 3 6L 3 73 Two Door 8 600 Ibs 25 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Rubicon 8 900 kg 2 32 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg Model 4WD 3 6L 4 10 Two Door 8 600 Ibs 25 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Rubicon 3 900 kg 2 32 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg Model 4WD
17. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints next to each other You installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt must use the seat belt for the center position You can to check what type of seat belt each seating position has then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard 1 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the positions Please refer to Installing The LATCH tether strap of the child seat so that you can more Compatible Child Restraint System in this Child easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle Restraints section for typical installation instruc anchorages tions 2 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing you
18. NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion 035801681 19 Close the front header latches 035801680 20 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 18 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows and as far inward as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 Raising The Soft Top 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the i side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the LAUD end Sov teen vor IBS sports bar until the header rests on the top of the 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame windshield frame in this section for further information 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider link Sunrider Models only 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 5 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows 6 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each latches to the door rails Sunrider Models only side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches 035907427 035801670 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 7 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them 8 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior panels over the rear roof bow side of t
19. Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II Cybersecurity Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system OBD II and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls Authorized service technicians may need to ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593 acc
20. Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information with another vehicle object or person and cause For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the following steps parking brake while parking on a hill and that the 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing driver is responsible for braking the vehicle straight forward Disabling And Enabling HSA 2 Shift the transmission into PARK This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the 3 Apply the parking brake current setting proceed as follows 4 Start the engine eve pra M d quus scans wheel eileen fell Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 6 Push the ESC Off button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within twenty seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times turn to the left 488 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses 7 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional slighty more than one half turn to the right 8 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was com pleted properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 9 Repeat these steps if you want to
21. WARNING Continued Event Data Recorder EDR not function properly if modifications are made This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in air bag system service If your seat including your certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur N
22. You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicles audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute the Uconnect Phone e Push the Voice Command button Following the beep say Mute To un mute the Uconnect Phone e Push the Voice Command button Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call f
23. ao eass 299 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Jeep STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS 16JK72 126 AC AA 2015 FCA US LLC All Rights Reserved Third Edition Jeep is a registered tr
24. post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could negative post of the booster battery result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581 WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in serious injury Only use the specific ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 2 Disconnect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 3 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 4 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
25. Average Fuel Economy llle 349 Distance To Empty DTE 349 Elapsed Time 22s ov RES 350 Vehicle Information lille 350 EVIC Units Selection UNITS IN Display 351 System Warnings 0 00 eee eee 351 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features isp de00 ed dan ue ed ead es Oe 352 Tire Pressure If Equipped 355 l CYBERSECURITY croas se sake eh ea 356 B UCONNECT 130 ci ce 0i0e 4s iieri E AGE 358 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 358 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play 000 361 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 363 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 366 UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 367 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 367 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play 22 sore 373 Notes On Playing MP3Files 375 LIST Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 378 INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 378 Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped 379 ll UCONNECT 230 AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK MEME RE MMC 384 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 384 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Oper
26. Elapsed Time Vehicle Information Coolant Temp e Oil Pressure 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses Transmission Temp Automatic Transmission Only Oil Life Remaining Automatic Oil Change Indica tor EVIC Units Selection e System Status and Warnings Personal Settings NOTE For features in the EVIC that can be reset Aver age Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time the EVIC prompts a reset with the RIGHT L7 arrow button graphic and the word RESET next to it When the RIGHT D arrow button is pushed the selected feature will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the RIGHT arrow button Pushing the RIGHT arrow button a second time will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time After three seconds without pushing the RIGHT arrow but ton RESET ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature will have been reset Compass Outside Temperature Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Push and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass headings the outside temperature ECO if the EVIC display is not already displaying this screen NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings
27. Fluid Level Check Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the a PBs to run out of the hole hole A when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove the fill plug B then the drain plug C The recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When replacing the plugs do not overtighten them You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Transfer Case 634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Appearance Care
28. Modifications that allow the engine to run on com pressed natural gas CNG or liquid propane LP may result in damage to the engine emissions and fuel system components Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso line containing up to 1576 ethanol E 15 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim ited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 539 If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability ncreased risk for fuel system component corrosion MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you s
29. No 15 Where are we meeting Where are you 16 Can this wait I need more direction 17 Bye for now LOL 18 When can we meet Why 19 Send number to call Ilove you 20 Start without me 9 MO Ug 9M Call me 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages e Push the Phone Se button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Voice Tree Main Menu Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030772523 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phon ok 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmati
30. TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Push the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play b
31. The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears 446 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The transmission gear selector has only PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the gear selector to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc Gear Selector Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE e After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear
32. When On is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection push and release the RIGHT gt arrow button until On or Off appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 Display Units In The EVIC can be changed between English and Metric units of measure The units apply to the Outside Tem perature Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty To make your selection push and release the RIGHT button until U S or METRIC appears Nav Turn By Turn If Equipped When on enables display of Navigation System street name turn direction and distance to turn information in the EVIC To make your selection push and release the RIGHT button until On or Off appears Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the compass outside temperature audio information ECO display If Display Fuel Saver is selected as ON only the ECO message will display in the audio information ECO line of the display If Display Fuel Saver is selected as OFF only the audio information will display in the audio information ECO line of the display when the audio system is on To make your selection push and release the RIGHT button until ON or OFF appears Compass Variance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Un derstanding Y
33. or Start Voice Training command You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Reset To Reset all settings using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone amp e button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book en tries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command For best performance e Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under Low to medium blower setting Low to medium vehicle speed Low road noise e Smooth road surface Fully closed windows Dry weather condition ee UNDERSTANDING TH
34. 8 Check Strap 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops on the windshield frame 4 Open the swing gate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls of the swing gate brackets will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear win
35. BAS 484 Tire Pressure lese Hill Start Assist HSA 00 485 Tire Inflation Pressures 0 Traction Control System TCS 488 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 514 Electronic Stability Control ESC 488 Radial Ply Tires 5 suck Ga alae keeles 514 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 496 Tire lypeBs oua c ee ERE LU ends 515 Trailer Sway Control TSC LL 497 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 517 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 497 Spare Tires If Equipped 517 432 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Spinning cis ok ee Rem es 520 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 538 Tread Wear Indicators 4 520 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 538 Lite Of Tie uk esed ea eer ege Kors 521 MMT In Gasoline s segregan aaaea ea ea 539 Replacement Tires 2 2 2 00000 522 Materials Added To Fuel 539 E TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 523 Fuel System Cautions scc secese rerai 540 E TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 525 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 541 E TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 526 W ADDING FUEL 0 005 541 Base TPM System 0 0 0 e ee eee 528 Fuel Piller Cap socs Ad se RE 541 Premium S
36. Copyright 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 326 32 31 CER EUER RIT pa ae al aca Wh a RUE iru a d eo RS RC p 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE leeeeee eh 11 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee s 105 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee m rrt 303 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 53 21 33 ta Uer RR EG ox m eae ees oie e DOR RON d e A c ete 429 6 WHALE TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 9 a adeo 3g 3p 9 o4 m ease ade ace ce de EUR ICA OB ROAD 567 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ss 4 13 x2 9 eo deg E ed ox eee ate Ae P En A PEOR See RC 589 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 5455255964 Sor o9 Be ad BE bee ADAC NL RU ey CR C ae Se le 661 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eee e re 669 Em INDEX a ger rr Ir rp PMCID Pp 681 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 0000 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 8 M ROLLOVER WARNING 00 5 Mi VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 9 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 6 ll WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workman ship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized
37. Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion push and release the RIGHT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn With Lock When on is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pushed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Lock feature To make your selection push and release the RIGHT button until On or Off appears Flash Lamp with Lock When on is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with Lock feature selected To make your selection push and release the RIGHT button until On or Off appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection push and release the RIGHT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
38. Gear Ranges ae vce ee eke der Rh ed 439 446 Gear Select Lever Override 584 General Information 000 146 Glass Cleaning cese ee Tuer e catia e es d 638 Gross Axle Weight Rating l l 547 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 546 GVWR despieces danega Goa XS E Y ES gd 544 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 114 Hard TOP reseed Sete RES Saban ES 205 Hard Top Modular ia deni llle 205 Hard Top Removal llleeeleesess 213 Hazard Warning Flasher s cssc secese erse wa 568 Headlights AXutomalic 54 some EE a E ERO a BERR ae 170 Bulb Replacement 00 0000 653 High Beam vet abe ot Whee dete 172 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 172 Passing as su dee de eei dee UR A e o 172 Replacing i5 iubes ba bosib aes Res 653 SWILCI secs cos Gets seve os dtc giao ee ea GIETEN S 170 Head Restraints iss aces EXER EA 160 Heated Mirrors 0 0 00 cee eee eee 114 Heated Seat sisse EVE 158 Heater i rk ee o RAR KER nex a 415 Heater Engine Block aedi sedre aeia 437 Hill Descent Control 2 2 0 0 0 0000 eee 497 Hill Descent Control Indicator 497 Hill Start Assist 0 00 ee ee 485 Hitches Trailer Towing a uode em eem aed Cae 549 Hood Release lee 168 690 INDEX MM Tgrittlon auc eR enr Ron law e Eg 14 Key coger Su a a E E eb atn 14 Ignition Key Removal 1 2 6 00000000000 14 Illumin
39. LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Push the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Push the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Push and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pushing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA mo
40. NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle 036101697 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 3 Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves forward to 4 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the unlock the Sunrider links 0359049773 material is folded back as shown NOTE The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not be activated for Sunrider use If activated the soft top must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels 036107474 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es 5 Locate the straps to secure the side bows Wrap the Closing The Sunrider m around the bows as shown Repeat on the other 1 Remove the straps from the side bows 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the vehicle 4 Hook the header latches to the loops on the wind shield frame close latches and return the sun visors to their original positions 5 Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider link 036107475 6 Reposition the sun visors ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be snapped into place If the tempera ture is 41 F
41. Non MP3 files named with the MP3 kHz extension may cause playback problems The radio is MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will Layer 3 192 160 128 not play the file 112 96 80 64 When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 56 48 40 32 an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 following table are supported In addition variable bit Layer 3 112 96 80 64 rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files 56 48 40 32 use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or 24 16 8 VBR bit rates ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase wit
42. Placard Tire And Loading Information 507 Power Brak S 4 ca eaa eR OR dai REOR Catena s 481 DoorLocks 4 xe doe x x Roe RR e 40 Inverter ure Y c Red pac eg 4E d ea us 188 IMIEFOES esaa aou Gs ere aerate OR E EE EU 113 604 INDEX ae Steering uua dass dep hen a e RR Rech acted 477 VID dOWS hints dade alae See rd EUR IE HEU D RUPEE 44 Power Steering Fl id soccer 659 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts 60 Preparation For Jacking 00 573 Pretensioners Seat Belts cide oi 6 aee bare hg ttd 60 Programmable Electronic Features 352 Radial Ply Tires llle 514 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 624 Radio Frequency General Information 0 19 28 31 Radio Operation 0 000 0000 384 413 Radio Sound Systems 00 384 Rear Axle Differential 00 634 Rear Swing Gate cssc kt ets Ken heh RES 47 Rear Window Defroster lisse 300 Rear Window Features lessen 299 Rear Wiper Washer sse 299 Recorder Event Data 0 0 000000 ce 75 Recreational Towing scouer t end ies 562 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral N 564 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral N 566 Reformulated Gasoline 000 537 Refrigerant oie senises adasi 607 608 Release Hood gt 2 0 0 00 cee ees 168 Reminder Seat Belt essor Rr s 50 Remote Control Door LOCKS 16 5 e
43. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline 522 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handlin
44. Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi nal equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types ee STARTING AND OPERATING 517 Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run
45. TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS ll ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED ll ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS ll OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped 463 The Basics Of Off Road Driving 464 When To Use 4L Low Range 465 Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation 465 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 465 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High PointS ie sec em re rey er E 467 Ell Climbing ev ERDER 470 Driving Through Water 0 472 After Driving Off Road 0 475 B POWER STEERING ss esses 477 Power Steering Fluid Check 477 B PARKING BRAKE 00000 478 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 B BRAKE SYSTEM 0 04465 004 te Ee Ce 481 W TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 499 ll ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 481 Tire Markings llle 499 Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD 482 Tire Identification Number TIN 503 Brake System Warning Light 482 Tire Terminology And Definitions Anti Lock Brake System ABS 482 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Anti Lock Brake Warning Light 484 W TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Brake Assist System
46. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected it will stay on until the fault is cleared If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Refer to Occupant Restraints for further information Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Ad
47. are low but not provide actual tire pressure The low tire ISO telltale will illuminate along with LoTIrE message displayed in the ODO and then it will scroll to which tire location is lower than the Placard Value LF Left Front rF right Front Lr Left rear rr right rear NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS when swapped with a low pressure road tire In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 1
48. be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only 498 STARTING AND OPERATING Se be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1st 1 mph 1 5 km h 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h 3rd 4 mph 6 5 km h 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h DRIVE 7 5 mph 12 km h REVERSE 1 mph 1 5 km h However the driver can override HDC operation by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed If more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed STARTING AND OPERATING 499 Enabling HDC TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 1 Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Refer to Tire Markings Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Oper ating for further information 2 Push the Hill Descent button The Hill Descent Control Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will turn on solid NOTE e
49. jumper cable from the positive post of the vehicle with the discharged battery If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular devices etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation Continued 582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION Continued the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accel erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clu
50. place on the spare tire carrier Inboard Screw Location 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover 656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate Two Door Models 18 6 Gallons 70 Liters Four Door Models 22 5 Gallons 85 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 6L Engine 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze 10 5 Quarts 9 9 Liters Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 87 Octane 0 15 Ethanol 658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Tec
51. 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Push the buttons to select AM or FM mode 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses SET Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display win
52. 3 6L Manual 3 21 Four Door 7 400 Ibs 32 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Sport Model 3 357 kg 2 97 sq m 907 kg 91 kg AWD 3 6L Manual 3 73 Four Door 8 900 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Sport Model 4 037 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg AWD 3 6L 3 21 Four Door 7 400 Ibs 32 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Automatic Sport Model 3 357 kg 2 97 sq m 907 kg 91 kg AWD ee STARTING AND OPERATING 553 Fuse GCWR Gross Frontal Max GTW Max Trailer Tran ae i Axle Model Combined Wt Area Gross Trailer Tongue Wt UR Rating Wt See Note 3 6L 3 73 Four Door 8 900 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Sport Model 4 037 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg AWD 3 6L Manual 3 21 Four Door 7 500 Ibs 32 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Sahara Model 3 402 kg 2 97 sq m 907 kg 91 kg AWD 3 6L Manual 3 73 Four Door 9 000 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Sahara Model 4 082 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg AWD 3 6L 3 21 Four Door 7 500 Ibs 32 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Automatic Sahara Model 3 402 kg 2 97 sq m 907 kg 91 kg AWD 3 6L 3 73 Four Door 9 000 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Sahara Model 4 082 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg AWD 554 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Engine GCWR Gross Frontal Max GTW Max Trailer Transmission Axle Model Combined Wt Atea Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 6L Manual 4 10 Four Door 9 200 Ibs 32 s
53. 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers 598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils This symbol certifies 0W 20 5W 20 0W 30 5W 30 and 10W 30 en gine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 6L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera tures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599 NOTE MOPAR SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil
54. 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items Set Clock Pushing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours push the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL con trol knob Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
55. Air Conditioning system is en gaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about ten seconds e MAX AIC For maximum cooling turn on the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417 e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air
56. Compact Spare cers trer ee eee 518 General Information 05 511 517 High Speed ices RES eR EXPERTEM 514 Inflation Pressures 1 lees 512 Jacking ier eR ede RES 571 575 lite Of Tues ier UR wees EENE RE 521 Load Capacity ek er 506 508 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 526 Pressure Warning Light Quality Grading ce 64a e eee ed 677 Radial ts deren sine arse Seeks ok panned 514 Replacement i224 o eibi kae Pk Rn 522 ROtatON x cd ene aa den Fa Va E Eae das 525 Salty se BELA ae c bbs e eee rubus 499 511 SIZES CRM 501 Snow Wires se sete meat 8454050408000 cd 516 Spare Dre kr 9 tees En 517 519 572 SDIDDIDIE eau serpere eise m be dus 520 Tread Wear Indicators ills 520 Tire Safety Information 0 0 499 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 555 To Open Hoods eer RR RES tak ee em 168 Tow Hooks Emergency lees 583 JOWHIYB cs esten d vue due eh SOR ee id 546 550 585 24 Hour Towing Assistance sss 129 Disabled Vehicle llle 585 Recreational sav ew os aes wed Redes 562 WOT SIE cns ttes ane lth fy bo S Greig elie meds 550 en INDEX 699 Towing Assistance ie Ree ees 129 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome 562 Trac Lok Rear Axle llle 458 Traction Control scoi iciga estama ee a 488 Trailer Sway Control TSC 0 0 497 Trailer TOWIDS un ei x mene eine eae a 546 Cooling System Tips
57. Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using Voice Com mands 1 Push the Phone amp e button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete 3 After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list push the Voice Command button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete 4 After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE igs List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can not be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries To delete or erase ALL Uconnect phonebook entries using Voice Command T 2 Push the Ph
58. Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire 518 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the lette
59. Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons Spring Summer Fall and Winter Traction levels may vary between different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer 516 STARTING AND OPERATING Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use Summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle WARNING Do not use Summer tires in snow ice conditions You could lose vehicle control resulting in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control Snow Tires
60. Gate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn On Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps Push the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds While the LOCK button is pushed after four seconds push the RKE transmitter PANIC button Release both buttons A N The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is activated the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pushin
61. Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply push the Phone amp e button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the Phone amp e button on the faceplate Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pair ing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Push the Phone Xe button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e e enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN Y
62. If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled e If the ESC senses that the brakes are overheating the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will become deactivated until 054903773 the brakes have cooled 1 US DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN Disabling HDC 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure Push the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and out of 4WD LOW range The Hill Descent Control Temperature Grades Indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn off 500 STARTING AND OPERATING x NOTE e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size d
63. It Means 4WD Indicator Light 4wp This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Sway Bar Indicator Light Ree This indicator will illuminate when the front sway bar is disconnected Green Telltale Indicator Lights Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped Green Telltale Light ED Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on What It Means UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Turn Signal Indicator Lights Green Telltale Light What It Means 5 Turn Signal Indicator Lights The left or right arrow will flash with the corresponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn signal lever is operated A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb White Telltale Indicator Lights Cruise Control On Indicator Light White Telltale Light What It Means CRUISE Cruise Control On Indicator Light This indicator shows when the electronic speed control s
64. MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 Sampling S ib n Frequency Bit Rate kbps pecificatio kHz WMA 44 1 and 48 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback Of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode For MP3 WMA Play Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done b
65. Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the gear selector in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Push the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features displays in the EVIC 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Push the DOWN V arrow button until Calibrate NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from Compass displays in the EVIC the top of the instrument panel this is where the compass sensor is located 4 Push and release the RIGHT gt arrow button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where g the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly 6 748 040506040 set the compass will automatically compensate for the Compass Variance Map differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 To Change The Compass Variance 1 Turn the ignition switch RUN it is not necessary to start the engine 2 Push the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features displays in the EVIC 3 Push
66. Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 j t es Wit Q a 2 RU ay S 3 i H i t i E i ramet Am WEATED SEAT Loe DJUSTABLE LECTR NIC PROGRAM DRAKE wren PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM i A x v UU Ei a e NS d i gii A d E i E a mm A L i i i i E i i i Li z0o g Ji O H D i i ise E3 gp g A a e d Hh o6 A omm wa amp No 9A ein silio SUME Sc mis oe JL oe Se ST ee oan e a l b T B 25 uu CONTROL OFF 010533317 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision bodily injury and or death It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owner s Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warn ings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears underbody on the right side of the frame rail near the center of the vehicle as well as on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label aff
67. Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637 To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will perma nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions Continued CAUTION Continued or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning wit
68. Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Program Type 16 Digit Character Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Display Information Inform Sports Sports Jazz Jazz Talk Talk News News Top 40 Top 40 Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather Oldies Oldies By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is Personality Persnlty displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Public Public station with the same selected Music Type name The Rhythm and Blues R amp B Music Type function only operates when in the FM Religious Music Rel Musc mode Religious Talk Rel Talk If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Rock Rock Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e gt II DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped DISC Pla
69. Sentry Key Programming lesse 18 Sentry Key Replacement 0004 17 Service Assistance lille 671 Service Contract iis od ie ba Rb e paced 673 Service Manuals 0 0 eee eee ees 676 settings Personal 433 84 bh Ea ced x ERR 352 Setting The Clock 0 359 368 385 Shif hg sodas peru uh aoo Ride ed dore we 443 Automatic Transmission less 443 Manual Transmission sees 438 Transfer Case Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral IN ua oig tees sLertto e teet 564 Transfer Case Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral NI 25x tu AES savas 566 Shift Lever Override llle 584 Shoulder Pells s 22255 een 40 got ee meee Satta gle 52 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 426 Signals MUMS s eer ms 104 171 654 655 Snow Chains Tire Chains isses 523 SHOW TIS ans d es trt al Beas Ge drag a i be ital a rs 516 en INDEX 697 DOL TOPs ue T eae i eee Bae BGG 224 257 Spare Dre s eacus ERE dra xe 517 518 519 572 Spark Plugs 2929s RR eerte cad 657 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 00 00 eee eee 657 Ou bs ahaha ace dr nie d ON d Gre a tae ee eed 657 Speed Control Accel Decel 1 3 hides e aes as 184 Cancel res ecrit eU a a es 182 Resume 0 0 0 ee 182 Speed Control Cruise Control issu 180 Star ng iios eR ERA 28 434 435 Automatic Transmission 435 Cold Weather l
70. Shell Helix or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting MS 6395 is not available Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area 600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full fl
71. Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could push the Voice Command button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To turn confirmation prompts on or off using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone amp e button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say e Setup Confirmations Prompts On e Setup Confirmations Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
72. TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED 583 Jack Location 4 cca ead sce RR aes 572 E GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE 584 O Spare Tire Removal sestren es ehetes 572 E TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 585 Preparations For Jacking 540 s4 s s ora O Without The Ignition Key 587 Jac ing IMGUUEHONS Annas a eiat s Four Wheel Drive Models 00 588 568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warnin flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped shift transmission in
73. Technology OAT engine cool If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains ant is different and should not be mixed with visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat MS 90032 ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Selection Of Coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in thorized dealer as soon as possible Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623 CAUTION Continued rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that al lows extende
74. To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 562 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four Wheel Drive Models Flat Tow NONE See Instructions Automatic transmission in PARK Manual transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL N Transfer case in NEUTRAL N Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK NOTE When recreational towing your vehicle always follow applicable state and provincial laws Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details ee STARTING AND OPERATING 563 Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Continued e Manual transmissions must be placed in gear not in Neutral for recreational towing Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL N to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL N automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK and manual transm
75. Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s ra Removal in this section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B pillar near the top of the door using a 40 Torx head driver Four Door Only 035707391 4 Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a 40 Torx head driver NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 2 Install the right panel first then the left panel 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of 6 Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of the rear window glass Lift the rear window glass the vehicle Wire Harness Connector 0309044643 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 7 Release the red locking tab by pulling outward to the 8 To remove the wiring harness push the tab and pull right downward to disconnect l N 035734180 035734181 Red Locking Tab Push Tab To Disconnect 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 9 To remove the washer hose pinch the grips on hose connector and pull downward fax 035734182 Pinch Grip On Hose 10 Close the swing gate 11 Remove
76. Wiper Washer If Equipped 6 Reinstall the wiper arms 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control 300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operation one and the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release the wiper will cycle two to three times before returning to the set position Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to activate the rear washer The washer pump If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at Rear Window Defroster If Equipped ste The rear window defroster button is located on the climate controls mode control knob Push the button to turn on the rear window defroster An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an addi tional five minutes of operation push the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the
77. Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and or that slow pressure loss is occurring In these s cases optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised Stop the vehicle avoiding sharp braking and steering Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low
78. You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pushing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 inch 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTR
79. align ment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h WARNING Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have a collision Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two rear wheels the differential automati cally proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction STARTING AND OPERATING 459 WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen N 9 tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument e panel to the left of the steering column Axle Lock Switch This feature
80. amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property dam age Continued is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer e If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer 644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE SS Totally Integrated Power Module 7 4m LENS The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center con tains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover Totally Integrated Power Module Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description jl J2 30 Amp Pink Transfer Case Module Ja s j4 25 Amp Clear Driver Door Node ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J5 25 Amp Clear Passenger Door Node J6 40 Amp Green Anti Lock Brake System ABS Pump Stability Con trol System J7 30 Amp Pink Anti Lock Brake System ABS Valve Stability Co
81. and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B MIRRORS 2ussacatuitkricpbut eid rd Ea hend 111 Cancel Command Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped 111 Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Mobile Outside Mirrors isse ij A ug sat posdidqrwtusdidqietent i Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 112 Dial by Saying a Number 119 Power Mirrors If Equipped 113 Call by Saying OMAR ie S ad torii sitas Hn cecum a aaa ma Shansfer From Mobile Phone scs Vanity Mirrors ia xa gp ha ahh eae Cy d ae 114 Add Namesto Yo r Uconnect Pinduol dil SE CONNECT ESONE e E EEE quitan oe Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries 122 Po pal ne oer AAG ee aA d Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry 123 Help Command llle 118 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Front Seat Adjustment 0 153 Entities a eso ucc Rena ea
82. are not updated when the vehicle is not moving es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The ECO message will display below the outside tem perature in the EVIC display if the audio system is on the ECO indicator will override the audio information display line if the Display Fuel Saver personal setting is ON see Personal Settings section This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration
83. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the devic
84. are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause Continued 450 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses CAUTION Continued severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing a heavy trailer use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these condi tions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored e
85. bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Downhill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low and proceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle bra
86. case NEUTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is in PARK or manual transmission is in gear The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD system mode position see the information below 2H Position This range is used for normal street and highway driving on hard surfaced roads 4H Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position N Neutral Position This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Start ing And Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 4L Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4L provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25
87. cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate e The feature must be enabled The vehicle must be stopped e Park brake must be off e Driver door must be closed The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears The system will not activate if the transmission 486 STARTING AND OPERATING Se is in PARK or NEUTRAL For vehicles equipped with Towing With HSA a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will remain active WARNING HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer WARNING Th
88. disconnected Hinge Pin Screw 3 Slide the front seat s fully forward 4 Remove the trim access door from the bottom of the B pillar THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 0217045574 Connector Latched Connector Unplugged 6 Unhook the door strap from the body hook 7 With the door open lift the door to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door NOTE Doors are heavy use caution when removing them 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks All doors are equipped with an interior rocker type door lock lever To lock a door when leaving your vehicle push the rocker lever forward to the LOCK position and close the door To UNLOCK the door push the rocker lever rearward Manual Door Lock Full Frame Doors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING e For personal security reasons and safety in a colli sion lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle eee s Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is Manual Door Lock Half Doors dange
89. down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation CAUTION Do not use 4L Low range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement Driveline hardware dam age can result When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift into 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud steep in clines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L Low range Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simultane ous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving In Snow Mud And Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission into a low gear and 466 STARTING AND OPERATING Se the transfer case into 4L Low if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a sto
90. drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow Shift into first gear manual transmission or DRIVE auto matic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 to 5 mph 5 to 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion CAUTION e Water ingestion into the axles transmission trans fer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your br
91. equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section
92. flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets 418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Mix D Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost gv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pushed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pushing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not re
93. foot off the accelerator pedal slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC I OR ROCK TRAC WARNING Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have a collision Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged 454 STARTING AND OPERATING Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions e 2H Two Wheel Drive High Range e 4H Four Wheel Drive High Range e N Neutral e 4L Four Wheel Drive Low Range b 051840679 Four Wheel Drive Gear Selector The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as hard surfaced roads In the event that additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455 rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents Refer to Shifting Procedures in this section for further information on shifting in
94. from the sport bar bracket 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE wr A gt 036072290 036072293 8 Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store ina 9 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three clean dry location another person may be needed to Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Instal help with this operation lation in this section NOTE If you are doing this alone use one arm to hold the bundle up the other to remove the brackets ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Installing The Soft Top Four Door Models 4 Install the soft top with the pivot brackets above the sport bar brackets lower the soft top into the sport bar bracket slots in a downward motion to lock tab on soft top You will need to lift the top to get the brackets to line up Another person may be needed to help with 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard this operation top removal NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section NOTE If you are doing this alone use one arm to hold Right and left door frames the soft top up the other to align the brackets e Six door frame attachment knobs e Right and left quarter windows Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Re moval in this section 3 Install the door f
95. h For speeds at or exceeding approximately 40 mph 64 km h the ESC goes into ESC Partial Off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system goes back to ESC Full Off The ESC is in ESC Full Off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but the ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESC OFF Indicator Light will always be illumi nated in 4L range when ESC is in ESC Full Off or ESC Partial Off NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESC in ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features offered by ESC and ERM are disabled In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The ESC Full Off mode is intended for off road use only 494 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 2H Range 4WD Models Or 2WD Models ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2H range and on 2WD vehicles ESC Partial Off When in ESC Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light w
96. have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Air Bag Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is e first turned to
97. heard or felt while drive belt is in operation Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools we recommend having your vehicle ser viced at an authorized dealer Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid Continued 606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehic
98. in a particular impact event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the SAB on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require SAB occupant protection In side impacts the SABs deploy independently a left side impact deploys the left SAB only and a right side impact deploys the right side SAB only Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not SABs should have deployed The SABs if equipped with SABs will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment SABs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system SABs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es very close to SABs can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SABs inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from an inflating SAB To get the best protection from the SABs occupants must wear their seat belts p
99. inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base TPM System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound while stowed in the spare location STARTING AND OPERATING 529 i The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the EVIC and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the f
100. inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 307 Control Buttons 0 a E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 308 Compass Temperature Display ll WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS 312 Trip Conditions 22 scere RR sia 340 Red Telltale Indicator Lights 313 B ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights 322 VENIO TE POURED qcdotibdsaudi tds HH Green Telltale Indicator Lights 332 Bs hU UR MR E uie 244 White Telltale Indicator Lights 333 EVIC Main Menu cet reparte cco 345 Blue Telltale Indicator Lights 335 Compass Outside Temperature Display ECO ll COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped 346 neem Ge eke cn NT d Digital Speedometer liess 349 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se
101. km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle Refer to the Tire And Loading Information placard for or other parts could be damaged the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a for your vehicle trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive the heavier loads train components the following guidelines are recom mended WARNING NOTE Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the correct fluid type Towing Requirements Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 557 WARNING Continued cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to the brakes axle engine transmission steer ing suspension chassis struc
102. lever and bring the seatback pal to its full forward position Tip n Slide Recline Lever Passenger Seat In addition to Easy Entry the front passenger seat is also equipped with Tip n Slide This feature allows for easier entry for rear passengers 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat With the seat forward pull the entire seat assembly forward Easy Entry toward the instrument panel 030934794 Easy Entry Lever Tip n Slide Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF Push the switch once to select HI level heating Push the switch a second time to select LO level heating Push the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation Then the heat output w
103. llle 561 Hitches 213130933 eae yore RES 549 Minimum Requirements lesse 556 Trailer And Tongue Weight 550 555 Wiring uses eer Ree me gd EAR Ree ens 559 Trailer Towing Guide llle 550 Trailer Weight sies eee gees es 550 Transaxle JActostic ko io d p he dh ah ae dae ek dex 451 Transfer Case cid Hdd eee Se REE E G 633 Kin c ce sedi die et oa eS AS wR EE 659 Four Wheel Drive Operation 454 MalNtenances ede e Tbe RR CR awa A 633 Transmission llle 628 Automatic 3 33 25 x Rond uw orem E a 445 628 ERU sese detec antera aur Gian RUE EN 659 Manual eeoa nerea tE do eed oes x 438 Shif ng v nog Sead nee e UR RS 443 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 27 Tread Wear Indicators llle 520 Trip Computer 2 234 025 6405 4 b RU E ed 336 Tum Signals 1 eee eee ee 171 654 655 UCI Connectors sinew c Re ee 404 Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity 133 Phone Call Features lle 125 Phone Features 1 0 0 0 00 eee ee eee 128 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Radio Mode Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio Multimedia Satellite Radio Operating Instructions CD Mode 700 INDEX ees Operating Instructions Radio Mode 367 Playing MP3 Files 0 0 00 cee ee eee 375 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 114 Uniform Tire Quality Grades llus 6
104. mph 40 km h CAUTION Exceeding 25 mph 40 km h while the transfer case is engaged in 4L may result in an engine overspeed condition and engine damage The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position NOTE When in 4L the ESC Off Indicator Light will display in the instrument cluster Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after complet ing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL N or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause with the transfer case in N Neutral Once the shift is completed place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmis sion 458 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
105. oes eda aad fade aa 625 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 0 482 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 323 Appearance Care i su ossa e E RA ES KKE Rd 634 Arming System Security Alarm sss 20 Assistance TOWING a seo e wx RR ws 129 Assist Hull Start oos em roe ae Ed 485 Auto Down Power Windows s s 45 en INDEX 683 Automatic Dimming Mirror 112 Automatic Door Locks isle 41 Automatic Headlights 00 170 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 351 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 419 Automatic Transmission 445 628 631 Adding Fluid 2 4 0 i20e2200eiee0 ieee need 631 Fluid And Filter Changes 0 631 Fluid Change ous tere Eee Red 631 Fluid Level Check llle 629 Fluid Types os ce st RR Ra 628 659 Special Additives 000 629 AutOSUckos ease Ae PRR Se eeu ie eras 451 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 185 Auxiliary Power Outlet llle 185 Axle Fluid 2 cout RR ER RIDRRSEXR EE E 659 Axle Locks iu chee evades ee eS RUE e 459 Battery seisena deede uere se dA aie etd 313 605 Charging System Light 0 313 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 27 Belts Seaton e Pera PEP EEA DEES RS ees 101 Body Mechanism Lubrication 611 B Pillaf Location eut e b eR REESE A 506 Brake Assist System het ae
106. or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 549 WARNING Continued e Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional infor
107. or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rear facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seat
108. path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee I WARNING e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap 1022633862 Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should b
109. quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up
110. quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended Prop erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im proved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components 538 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as ethanol CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso line containing more than 1576 ethanol E 15 Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15 ethanol E 15 Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15 ethanol E 15 or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty
111. radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nn Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multi session disc formats are supported by the radio Multi session discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multi session discs The use of multi session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 Supported MP3 File Formats ERG Sampling The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten Specificati Frequency Bit Rate kbps pecification sion as MP3 files
112. release the MENU button to return to the Main Menu Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transmission or when the gear selector is in PARK auto transmission Push and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the DOWN V arrow button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Push the RIGHT L arrow button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Auto Lock Doors IF Equipped When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled to make your selection push and release the RIGHT gt arrow button until On or Off appears Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection push and release the RIGHT button until On or Off appears RKE Unlock If Equipped When
113. remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle control during braking The ABS performs a self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven During this self check you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begins to lock Road conditions such as ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa tion s You also may experience the following when ABS activates The ABS motor noise it may continue to run for a short time after the stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 e The clicking sound of solenoid valves WARNING Continued press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop ca jenen Ton eee TA ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
114. retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING Continued Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency jd locking mode 12 years or younger including a child in a rear E WARNING e The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode ture or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the proce dures in the Service Manual 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could the entire seat belt is extracted increase the risk of injury in collisions Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats The locked mode is only used to install rear facing or forward facing How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child facing child restr
115. return this feature to its previous setting Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel s and or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS Brake Limited Differ ential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differen tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by apply ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 4
116. screen TIME Button Push the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 3 After adjusting the hours push the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Push the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save the time change 5 To exit push any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Push the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to t
117. section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the Continued recommended fluid ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629 NOTE No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifica tions Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission Avoid using transmission seal ers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature approximately 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfort
118. serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main taining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the Sway Bar Switch stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system Push indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will once again attempt to return to off road mode the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation transition or when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off road position Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting And Operating for further information The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This
119. siriusxm ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on push the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Push any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Satellite Mode Push the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under
120. steering column up or down as desired Pull upwards on the lever to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column Lever WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Electronic Speed Control Buttons Indicator Light will turn off The system should be 1 ON OFF 3 SET turned off when not in use 2 RES 4 CANCEL 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES O
121. the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily push and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Units Selection UNITS IN Display Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty features Push and release the DOWN V arrow button to toggle units between U S and METRIC System Warnings Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning Messages stored Pushing and releasing the DOWN V arrow button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are active Warning Messages 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se stored Pushing and releasing the DOWN V arrow button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will display each stored warning for each button push Push and
122. the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting And Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 547 Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on
123. the hard top from the vehicle Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage NOTE The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults located on each corner Failure to follow this caution could damage the Freedom Top Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 NOTE CAUTION Continued Careless handling and storage of the removable door frame s may damage the seals causing water The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body should be torqued to 88 in lb 22 in Ib 10 Nm 25 Nm to leak into the vehicle s interior e It is not necessary to pinch connection when rein e The door frame s must be positioned properly to stalling washer hose Push on until click is heard ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior DOOR FRAME CAUTION WARNING Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior S Do nor duyegour veniclon public Dey aliens water damage stains or mildew door frame s removed as
124. then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off 031507503 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other Front Wiper Control NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031507504 Mist Control TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the turn signal lever 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the
125. this vehicle Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if Ro equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone Sw button and Voice Com mand button that will enable you to access the system When you push the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE The driver side upper windshield trim contains the microphone for the Uconnect Phone Voice Command Button WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death e VR The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so
126. to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the ignition to the LOCK OFF position before restart ing Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the LOCK OFF position first PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the gear selector out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade NOTE On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the
127. use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597 CAUTION Continued transmission or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a warmed up engine has been shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding 1 quart 0 95 liters of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time whichever comes first The
128. utility vehicle It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information en INTRODUCTION 5 This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Pleas
129. vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating sec tion of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amou
130. vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Trailer Sway Conirol TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in this section for further informa tion When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary 4 The symbol indicates the status of the Hill Descent Control HDC feature The lamp will
131. will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less 460 STARTING AND OPERATING Se To activate the system push the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate push the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate When the rear axle is locked pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles push the top of the AXLE LOCK switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column STARTING AND OPERATING 461 sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal driving conditions WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in
132. with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Seat Adjustment The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion near the floor While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Adjusting Bar Location ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 0309063795 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt 0309063796 Seat Height Adjustment Front Seatback Recline Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle located on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat push Lean forward before lifting the handle t
133. you will lose the protec j tion that they can provide This procedure is fur Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior nished for use during off road operation only Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that Continued they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE m Door Frame Removal WARNING 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs two per door Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the front of the door frame 3 Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 035801658 WARNING 4 Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for storage Store in a secure location Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door frame s removed as you will lose the protec tion that they can provide This procedure is fur nished for use during off road operation only Continued 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will los
134. your vehicle is in a seat and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold using a seat belt properly down easily Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to its mid track position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 To Fold Down The Rear Seat NOTE You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape EB To Raise The Rear Seat Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If d you cannot extend the center shoulder belt make sure your seatback is fully latched Locate the release lever upper outboard side of seat and lift it upward until the seatback releases Release Levers Slowly fold down the seatback 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched s
135. 0 0 0 eee eae 59 Seat Belt Pretensioner 0 00000 eae 60 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0000 cea 50 Seat Belt System 1 ee eee eee eee 48 Seat Belt Maintenance 00 002 eee 639 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 0 0 0c eee ae 50 Seat Belts oraga uraa diut bes be der GU RN 50 101 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 0 58 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 58 Child Restraint oo ce csc 0 0 cee ee eae 76 Extender 3 4 35 34 rpne ached e A wane MEG wee ates 59 Front Seat iudice e was db eaten and 50 52 55 InspectiOti s viles dnd Seed Moe EROR Kd 101 Operating Instructions 55 Pregnant Women io dressage panas ded 60 606 INDEX ee Pretensloners secesia here UR Ree E Lee 60 Reari5eat iacu dn anew aah a perder Rb 52 Reminders 222 2408 dd rr E eR Er 314 Untwisting Procedure 000 57 Seals ia a docs vbt eed d Ede Ke Y V gd dea ie 152 Adjustment ies ease Pa Per RR RR A 153 Easy Entty 4 ie RR E Se uel s 155 Fold And Tumble Rear 163 Heated idee Rig eae om AERE es 158 Height Adjustment 005 154 Rear Folding 0 0 00 eee eee 166 Removal ss ie sees ca rm hh 165 seatback Release see aey dle e eey da 154 TIGNE serr ae ee so cerais np eeii 154 Security Alarm nes ne nEn eee 20 320 Security System scs Gey eg PET EEE Ea 20 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze 657 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 16
136. 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 675 WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet
137. 34 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 035905867 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 8 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 036067913 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Lowering The Soft Top c m 1 Header Bow 6 Quarter Window 2 2 Bow 7 Check Strap 3 3 Bow 8 Front Retainer Quarter Window 4 Sail Panel 9 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 5 Body Side Retainer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush C
138. 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top CAUTION down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax buildup may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is Please visit the Owners Manual on your DVD for instructional videos The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunt ing or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow ete below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result e Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top Grit may scratch the window has been folded down for a period of time the top will Do not move your vehicle until the top has been appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it either fully attached to the windshield frame or difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction fully lowered of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Continued 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Continued WARNING Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur e Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion
139. 5 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 531 vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module 532 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE 33 33 0558008415 i 33 33 Tire Pressure Monitor Display NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sen
140. 51 13 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate 14 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear at the lower left corner of the rear window opening window The spongy part of the seal should be down Ensure that the zippers are properly started and and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate aligned before zipping to prevent damage when closed 036033904 035801691 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 16 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets 15 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 17 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate 19 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to bracket on both the left and right sides their secured position 035801695 eis 036033903 18 Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the sail panel retainers into the body side channel 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SSS SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS IF Opening The Sunrider eee 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side CAUTION 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior
141. 59 1 Air Outlet 7 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 3 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank 4 Assist Handle 10 Power Mirror Switch If Equipped 5 Glove Compartment 11 Horn 6 Power Window Switches 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0403073061 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position e The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is located 2 Speedometer e Indicates vehicle speed 3 Tachometer ndicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 4 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indi cates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem perature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner tur
142. 77 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector Unleaded Gasoline 0 0 0 ee 537 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 57 Vanity Mirrors 5 iss d cong Hg bashes vae deseo 114 Variance Compass 1 eee 338 348 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading exu nem 508 544 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storages sci ce er REIS 425 650 Viscosity Engine Oil 1 scele ce Rees 598 Voice Command Commands lees 148 System Operation asse d rp ak eri ra 146 Voice Training seach Fae d on Re Re DR e e n 152 Voice Recognition System VR less 146 Warnings And Cautions llle 8 Warranty Information llle 675 Washers Windshield llis 617 Washing Vehicle t tanisa s a katsed 635 Wheel And Wheel Trim lille 636 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care llslsss 636 Wind Buffetng s ss penser ehm rte dor pd 47 Window Fogging 0 0 6 2 002s 426 Windows isa eese aaa eee os a a od 44 POW OR suus odas Pace ooa et a Es d 44 Windshield Defroster 102 418 423 Windshield Folding llis 293 Windshield Washers 0000585 176 617 Eluid esser tertias dites eate rie Ronde td 617 Windshield Wiper Blades 000 611 Windshield Wipers l llllleeleesse 176 Wiper Blade Replacement 611 Wiper Rear a cass eed e ew ee
143. 89 Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap propriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Continued 490 STARTING AND OPERATING es WARNING Continued
144. 912 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 2 Install rear corner panels 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Rotate the header forward 4 Engage the header latches 036107424 035801670 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 5 Install the back window 6 Install the side windows 036033904 036007407 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 7 To install the side windows affix the window tempo 8 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door rarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner Start channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 035905867 1 Incorrect Insertion 036067913 2 Correct Insertion 036067913 9 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 4 4 Bow 5 Sail Panel 6 Body Side Retainer 7 Quarter Window
145. AND OPERATING e ESC OFF Switch When in ESC Full Off mode ESC and TCS except for the Brake Limited Differential BLD feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches an approximate speed of 40 mph 64 km h For speeds at or exceeding approximately 40 mph 64 km h the ESC goes into ESC Partial Off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system goes back to ESC Full Off To turn ESC on again momentarily push the ESC OFF switch This will restore normal ESC On mode of operation The ESC Off Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC is in ESC Partial Off and ESC full Off WARNING With the ESC in ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features offered by ESC and ERM are disabled In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The ESC Full Off mode is intended for off road use only E STARTING AND OPERATING 493 4L Range AWD Models ESC Full Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range the ESC system will be in this mode In 4L range ESC and TCS except for the Brake Limited Differential BLD feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches an ap proximate speed of 40 mph 64 km
146. ANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top CAUTION Continued fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and 7 the top can then be installed If the temperature is 41 F Refer to Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa voll the tear or side curtains tion It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result WARNING e Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window CAUTION Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur curtain up unless the side curtains are also re moved Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers Continued Continued 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
147. And MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 inch 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT But
148. And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635 The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e e e e e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high
149. B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 679 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure
150. BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program Type Display 16 Digit Character ee eS Program Type Display Personality Persnlty No program type or None Public Public undefined Rhythm and Blues R amp B Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Music Rel Musc Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Infomaton hom Sports Sports Jazz Jazz Talk Talk News News Top 40 Top 40 Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather
151. Belt Inspection considered normal These are not a reason to replace belt However cracks running along a rib not across are not normal Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear frayed cords or severe glazing Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition switch position You could be injured by the moving fan blades You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic Accessory Belt Serpentine Belt When inspecting accessory drive belts small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib are ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605 Conditions that would require replacement e e e e e e Rib chunking one or more ribs has separated from belt body Rib or belt wear Longitudinal belt cracking cracks between two ribs Belt slips Groove jumping belt does not maintain correct position on pulley Belt broken note identify and correct problem before new belt is installed Noise objectionable squeal squeak or rumble is
152. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control syst
153. Bt Bag x xen eR AE Ree ales asis 72 102 318 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 324 Automatic Headlights 4 170 PASSING essa ecsea ha ne RR 3 RR E RERO 172 Back Up custodes idR oe roe Certe aid 655 Rear Servicing oues cse m Rae Rod ER ex as d 655 Brake Assist Warning 06 495 Rear Tail Lamps 52 be Re e Fd 655 Brake Warning cce Euer d ets 316 481 Seat Belt Reminder llle 314 Bulb Replacement 00 00000 653 security Alarm 244 44 44503699649 mia boa ee 320 CargO ziez cac oca eed cee eases dee aaa ess 175 SGEVICOG ct beatae dt niae ede we J 653 Center Mounted Stop 040 655 Side Markera us kaare CERE wee ees 655 Daytime Running 0 0000 eee 174 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 326 EXteflOE aa cx Re ee ed dates XU 104 Taction Control s ses eb Rem Rd 495 FOg izsc Re e eR ed E ER RR 172 654 Turn Signal ioo see 104 171 654 655 Hazard Warning Flasher 568 Loading Vehicle sucre suis llle Headlights i ser eae 170 653 jc m EE Headlight Switch llle 170 Locking Axles sc sg seem A I AER AG Hill Descent Control Indicator 497 LOCKS i d yx ck exu ex E PETET RETE Illuminated Entry 0 0 2 00000000 22 Automatic Door 0 ccc eee eee eee Instrument Cluster 2 0 0 00 eee eee 170 Child Protection sese Rd INPOTIOR arg og i ET 174 bus px 692 INDEX eee Power Doo
154. Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Warning And Indicator Lights or Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time whichever comes first The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 663 Severe Duty All Models Required Maintenance Intervals Change Engine Oil at 4 000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules o
155. E Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion 035963573 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door 6 Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider locking frame tracks and slide the top forward mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear doors 036067912 036067913 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the 9 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side bow until it rests on the windshield frame side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches 036107424 035801670 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 10 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them 11 Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow interior side
156. E FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE e Even though international dialing for most number e Even though the system is designed for users speaking Combinations is supported some shortcut dialing in North American English French and Spanish ac number combinations may not be supported cents the system may not always work for some Far End Audio Performance k e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Low to medium vehicle speed not in motion is recommended Audio quality is maximized under Low to medium blower setting e Low road noise tis not recommended to store similar sounding names e Smooth road surface in the Uconnect Phonebook e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local Fully closed windows name recognition rate is optimized when the entries e Dry weather conditions are not similar n EROS Operation from the driver s seat e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and You can say O letter O for 0 zero n t the Uconn ct Phone 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the i
157. E LA PLUS acum POUR LES ENFANT NE RMAUS PLACER UN SIEGE POUR ENGLNT ORIENT VERS LABRSEEK One DUVOSCULE A WARNING EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIRBAGS CHL ACN OUN KE IOLLED OM SERIOURI INIURED FY THE ARA THE RACK SEAT THE SAFEST PLACE FOR ColLDREN MOVER PUT A ICARLEAQNG CHILD SEAT IN DA FRONT MISSUS SANIES D CORO RETRANS TRMONS VTLAEA LB Communes OG G ANTE CTLUS rere SEE OWNER 1 MA MOAL FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT RETENUE POUR ENEANT ARIA COMIULT LE GE DE AUTOMOBILE POUR OFT PLE CC HENSOONLMENTI SUB LOS SAD ORE CALL S A MISEEN GARDE uo OVITE LES MLNOGUV RES A NRUPTUS O LA VITESSE QUEEN TOGIOUES PORTGA LES CONTURSI DE S CUMT pma ma prameni aana aA PLUA AMPLE ISNSDGAEMENT A WARNING s soo ns VOO ABRUPT MAGNES AN CICEESNE SPEED 2 E ALMUS NUCILE UP MEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMA TION 010308790 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this
158. ED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward lan guage with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 677 Owner s Ma
159. F YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed push the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with out erasing the set speed from memory Pushing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The sp
160. FCA Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Axle Differential Front We recommend you use MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 Axle Differential Rear 226 RBI Model 44 We recommend you use MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 662 Maintenance Chart llle ess 664 662 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the Change Oil or Oil
161. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio push the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio push the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Push the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and
162. GS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck led The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccu pied BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un buckled if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all occu pants to buckle their seat belts Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard fr
163. HICLE M WARNING Continued The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the ve hicle or to protect against injury during an acci dent Remember always wear seat belts Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch points when installing and removing the soft tops The zippers and side bows may cause serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in between CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior e The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top Refer to Lowering The Soft Top in this section for further information 1 Remove the side windows 035801673 2 Remove the back window 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Release header latches from the windshield frame 4 Release the sail panel retainers from the body side
164. IGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 511 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions e Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION j y mn M i shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure e Safety and Vehicle Stability e Economy e Tread Wear e Ride Comfort Continued 512 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive
165. INING YOUR VEHICLE 631 NOTE CAUTION Continued e The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the f ihe temperature is elevated enough to produce an actual level is at or above the hole accurate reading Run the engine at idle in PARK to e If it is necessary to check the transmission below the warm the fluid operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick 8 Reinstall the engine cover and snap it down securely with the fluid at approximately 80 F 27 C If the onto the four mounting studs fluid level is correctly established at 80 F 27 C it 9 Check for leaks Release the parking brake should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Re NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the member it is best to check the level at the normal transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make operating temperature sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from CAUTION its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Fluid And Filter Changes If the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper Continued maintenance intervals 632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M In addition change the fluid an
166. If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders a 035139163 The front cupholders are located in the center console Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Console Storage Compartment To lock or unlock the storage compartment insert the ignition key and turn To open the storage compartment push the latch and lift the cover 035139162 Rear Cupholders STORAGE Glove Compartment 035240181 The lockable glove compartment is located on the pas senger side of the lower instrument panel Pull outward on the handle latch to open the glove compartment Center Console 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M There is an extra storage area underneath the consolelid Rear Storage Compartment If Equipped The console lid has an integrated paper clip feature that can hold small items The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage compartment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 1 Hip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray Center Console L
167. Indicator Reset 0 0 351 Oil Engine i i sew eh ye y erm a 597 657 Capacity seres dres unpe e ee eS rie E end 656 en INDEX 693 Change Interval eressz RR 351 597 DipStiek Sst oce antra Romer Re e nt ds 597 Disposal a 49b ERR riss eterinis 599 Filii nettes estere adapte 600 657 Filter Disposal 1i eR REESE RR 599 Identification LOGO isses eres 598 Materials Added To 0 0000 599 Pressure Warning Light 315 Recommendation sees 598 656 Synthetic iius esses ee eR ER RE E a 599 VISCOSItY uere res efe ER Res 598 656 Oil Filter Change 20 403 5400 i rmn 600 Oil Filter Selection e soar ua 600 Oil Pressure Light llle ess 315 Onboard Diagnostic System 04 592 Operating Precautions llle 592 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors llle 111 Overdrive 22d x ese Re RE EE 451 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 0 0 00000 eee 451 Overheating Engine s ky awa Rcs 568 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 676 Paint Care ou t x cub ea e e Ces RUP ed 634 Panic Alaris usn dos SM aod deen dE eae dnx cn 25 Parking Brake s bus 904 8 444 84 4554 00 478 Passing Light so 200 6 ca cee bee nn 172 Personal Settings 2 6 6 eee eee 352 Pels ae Stes Raa eee ea E Re E Ex Ex 99 Pets Transporting 2 6 llle 99 Phone Cellular llle 114 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 4 114
168. Interval llle 351 OU Filter sas cese de ood hin odds Seed 600 Oil Selecti n ix xu ai tie Saad Gp RETE 598 656 Oil Synthetic re ak Gis eet ere de Ae a ee 599 Overheating cc eee e e eee es 568 DAKINE PPP 434 435 Engine Oil Viscosity llle 598 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 004 598 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 72 Entry System Illuminated 0 22 Eanos 4 vec hte Baines Sand Sane ed rev ed 538 Event Data Recorder 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee eae 75 Exhaust Gas Caution ss ses toesea aats esea 100 541 Exhaust System eee ne 100 618 Exterior Lights sccssesder v e deber em ers 104 Fabric Cafe i v uero Idee URP Ed 640 Fabric lop ase b ema 640 Filters Air Cleaner seeee ee 600 Air Conditioning 0 00000 426 608 Engine Oil ek ceca eR nnn 600 657 Engine Oil Disposal 000 599 Flashers Hazard Warning sese eR 568 Turn Signal e ee sse e n 104 654 655 Flash To Pass llle 172 Flooded Engine Starting 0 436 Fluid Brake iure er tu ERR aree t RR RE 659 688 INDEX ees Fluid Capacities e iae Psy demo nem I 656 Fluid Leaks llle 104 Fluid Level Checks 0 0 2 00 00 cee eee 634 Engine Ow sock yt ides ma baa a cae Oe 597 Manual Transmission less 632 Power Steering xs artico gun tee nsa a ded 477 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 657 Fog Li
169. It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are also re moved Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the ve hicle or to protect against injury during an acci dent Remember always wear seat belts Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch points when installing and removing the soft tops The zippers and side bows may cause serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in between Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior e The soft top must b
170. L position 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 9 Reinstall the gear selector override access cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting And Operating section 586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS Flat Tow NONE See instructions under Recreational Towing e Automatic Transmission in PARK Manual Transmission in gear NOT in Neutral e Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged r
171. MENT PANEL 337 Control Buttons NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving The Compass Temperature control buttons are located on the left spoke of the steering wheel The following displays can be reset or changed e Compass Temperature e AVG ECO changes to present fuel economy e ET will reset display e DTE distance to empty 040541179 These messages can be cycled through by pushing the STEP button on the steering wheel To reset the AVG ECO or ET push and hold the STEP button for approximately three seconds Mini Trip Control Buttons Push and release the STEP button on the steering wheel to access the options in the Compass display 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Temperature Display NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect Navi gation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zo
172. Means Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light ag When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 8 gal 10 6 L this light will turn on and a single chime will sound UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the igni
173. NCE SCHEDULES Ss The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Prepare A List Be Reasonable With Requests ll IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE FCA US LLC Customer Center FCA Canada Inc Customer Center In Mexico Contact Puerto Rico And U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY Service Contract E WARRANTY INFORMATION ll MOPAR PARTS ll REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C lille In Canada ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 675 670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades cae ti are oea a 00000 678 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 677 Treadweat 2e amp Aa acetone r aaa 677
174. NG Continued great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 732 8243 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information www tc gc ca eng motorvehiclesafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier
175. NG YOUR VEHICLE M EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen e The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ee MAINTAI
176. NING YOUR VEHICLE 595 the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equip
177. ON RUN If the light is either not on during startup stays on or turns on ry while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected it will stay on until the fault is cleared If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Coolant Temperature Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the temperature reading does not return E to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE As the coolant temperature gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H In this case a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minute duration is expired whichever comes first 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equip
178. OTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be pros ecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNI
179. OTE Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 035707992 035707993 Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Install the seat attachment strap at the top of the bag Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and through the loops straps facing the back of the rear seat Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages located at the base of the rear seat 035707994 035707995 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and Front Panel s Installation loop the strap through the buckle Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat NOTE Set the pan ls gn the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install the right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Front Panel s Installation With Rear Hard Top Removed 1 Turn the left and right panels over and move the spacer block located on the rear of the panel upward 035707996 90 degrees UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 3 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Rear Hard
180. OTE Prior to off road usage the side steps should be 2 Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle removed to prevent damage if so equipped 1 Remove the two nuts from the bodyside 464 STARTING AND OPERATING 053801776 Underside Bolt 3 Remove the side step assembly The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 465 WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie
181. PANEL ME Headlamps with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When on is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on If the headlights were turned on by this feature they will also turn off when the wipers are turned off To make your selection push and release the RIGHT gt arrow button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection push and release the RIGHT arrow button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumin Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion push and hold the RIGHT button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped
182. STANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 oe TOP IF EQUIPPED an Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior CAUTION water damage stains or mildew e It is recommended that the top be free of water e The hard top is not designed to carry any addi P tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build prior to panel removal Removing the top opening B d a door or lowering a window while the top is wet ing hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural mem may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior e The hard top assembly must be positioned prop erly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior e Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicles interior e The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior ber of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc e Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and body side or fully removed 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Panel s Removal NOTE Left panel must be removed before removing right panel 1 Fold down the sun visor and move it to the side 2 Tur
183. STRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT 130 042305232 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours push the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 A
184. Swing Gate 25 Sound Horn On Lock 0 02004 25 Using The Panic Alarm 00 25 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 26 General Information sese 31 Programming Additional Transmitters 27 WE DOORS conor eve o rer ota tnni pero res 32 Transmitter Battery Replacement 27 Upper Half Door Window Removal If General Information 0 28 M M M E G E REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM T MA Door Window Installation If IF EODIPPED crees soed OI RR EIOS 28 Pees Sn FERRARA ORS Ee queis How To Use Remote Start cc Liver vc 0 29 Front Door Removal 0000 33 Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Rear Door Removal Hour Doos Made ee se an Information Center EVIC If Equipped 29 W DOOR LOCKS 4c009sykeecees acne pares 38 To Enter Remote Start sisse ve n 30 Manual Door Locks isses 38 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Power Door Locks If Equipped 40 Vehucle s ec s ex Reed 31 Child Protection Door Lock System To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Reat Doors icis e E Rr aee d 42 Vehicle cites tet eas er bre es 31 Bl WINDOWS 2er RE RR ena 44 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
185. TE Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for WARNING 2H and 4H only vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi cantly less Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch E STARTING AND OPERATING 441 CAUTION Continued e Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and or damage the clutch even if the clutch pedal CAUTION e Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and clutch systems Any attempt to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal depressed may result dam age to the clutch system Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage When descending a hill be very careful to down shift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage and or clutch damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower Continued is pressed Descend
186. UIPPED 192 Removing The Soft Top Two Door Models 193 Installing The Soft Top Two Door Models 195 ll DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED 5232 3 err hm en 197 Removing The Soft Top Four Door Models Sk brem dae RD RR RS 198 Installing The Soft Top Four Door Models 201 ll FREEDOM TOP THREE PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP IF EQUIPPED 205 Front Panel s Removal lesus 206 Freedom Top Storage Bag lisse 208 Front Panel s Installation 212 Front Panel s Installation With Rear Hard lop Removed 4s s acide eres 212 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Rear Hard Top Removal 213 Mi SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS Rear Hard Top Installation 216 PERE EE siaip aipee En E DOOR FRAME cese m 217 M M Em Door Frame Removal 0 00 218 Slosig Ine sunnier Door Frame Installation Two Door Models E SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS 257 If Equipped isis RR irr bee eas 220 Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top 259 Door Frame Installation Four Door Models Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 264 If Equipped ios bed dre sala ces 221 Folding Down The Soft Top 270 BI SOBRE EDI ais
187. UMENT PANEL M If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting A CD a Push the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 the current sel
188. UR VEHICLE 175 A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center console You can turn this light on and off from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever This light is also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System Cargo Lamp The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The sports bar reading lights available on four door models can be turned on by pushing the switches located on either side of the lens Push a switch a second time to turn the light off Sports Bar Reading Light The rear cargo light may be turned on by pushing the lens Push the lens a second time to turn the light off 176 031434793 Rear Cargo Light When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom posi tion will cause all the interior lights to turn off This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the
189. UTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear drive Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or shaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission to roll even if the automatic transmission is in PARK Turn the engine OFF or manual transmission is in gear The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL N not in the vehicle Start the engine Shift the transmission into REVERSE ee STARTING AND OPERATING 565 8 Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual CAUTION transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear NEUTRAL N and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL N ensure that the engine 10 Turn the engine OFF is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK 11 Firmly apply the parking brake 13 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable 12 Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual tow bar transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL 14 Release the parking brake 566 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Shifting Out of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage L Bring
190. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate STARTING AND OPERATING 479 NOTE When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 480 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Never use the PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing childr
191. a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SCAN Button Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search push the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pushing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time push and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows
192. a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting And Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer 548 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Sway Control If Equipped The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue It typically provides adjustable friction associ ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
193. ably between the fingertips 630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Use the following procedure to check the transmission 7 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on fluid level properly i 2 Park the vehicle on level ground Remove the engine cover by pulling it up off the mounting studs two in the front and two in the rear Run the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear position allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position ending with the transmission in PARK Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated both sides The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature If the fluid level is low add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill Use ONLY the specified fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts for fluid specifications After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level ee MAINTA
194. ackward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or push the VR button and say Previous Track Jump backward in the current track by pushing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pushing and holding the FF gt gt button Asingle push backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five sec onds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pushing the SEEK gt gt button es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407 e e during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or push the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing push the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pushing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button push will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or push the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Push the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 device scan mode which will play the first ten seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start pl
195. ademark of FCA US LLC Printed in U S A
196. ae pene phere RPG RE ene 23 Starting System 0 eee eee eee 28 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 004 23 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 411 Remote Starting System llle sls 28 Replacement Bulbs 0 000040 651 Replacement Keys i kesasar arrosa snad danse 17 Replacement Parts elles 595 Replacement Tires ee dere De aeter dps 522 ee INDEX 695 Reporting Safety Defects 0 0 675 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 351 Restraint Head ccecce niert ercran ekiten 160 Restraints Child i 2 0 0 00 i eak eee eae 76 Restraints Occupants aedis Geta ea we hata 48 Rotation TNES sny ee Sasi ede hue er Rand 525 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle lis 101 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 104 Safety Defects Reporting ecra tinpi eena 675 Safety Exhaust Gas 6 0 llle 100 Safety Information Tire 0 0 499 Safety Tips cae cae er Pa e odie oe Ren as 100 Satellite Radio Antenna 0 381 401 Schedule Maintenance lees 662 Seat Belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 58 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 61 Energy Management Feature 61 Lap Shoulder Belt Operation 55 Lap Shoulder Belts 00000008 52 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 57 Pregnant Women su ee ne ae ke d 60 Seat Belt Extender
197. aint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 3 Allow the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Supplemental Resiraint System SRS Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e e e e e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light Af Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners e Seat Belt Buckle Switch e Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING e Being too close to the steering wheel or inst
198. akes will be less effective once wet and or muddy e This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at a depth of 30 inches 76 cm at speeds no greater than 5 mph 8 km h Water ingestion can occur causing damage to your vehicle 474 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increas ing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely Cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are abl
199. alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on road mode push the SWAY BAR switch again WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode the Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles STARTING AND OPERATING 463 An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped 053801775 Bodyside Nut N
200. alt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary 612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected Wiper Blade Removal Installation periodically not just when wiper performance problems are experienced This inspection should include the fol CAUTION lowing points Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against Wear Or Uneven Edges the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass Foreign Material may be damaged Hardening Or Cracking 1 Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the e Deformation Or Fatigue glass until the wiper arm is in the full up position If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613 holding the wiper arm with one hand slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm 0726033802 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Arm Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unloc
201. anchors in the center position Do not install a child restraint in the center rear of a 2 Door model 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Can two child restraints be attached using a No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two common lower LATCH anchorage or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower an chorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front back of the front passenger seat passenger seat if the child restraint manufac turer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes 2 Door Head restraints cannot be removed in the Model only 4 Door model THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion LATCH Anchorages Two Door Models 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Loc
202. ands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite ES e Next Station to select the next station Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Frequency f to change the frequency Previous Station to select the previous station Channel Number to change the channel by its e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu spoken number e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Next Channel to select the next channel e Previous Channel to select the previous channel e List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Frequency to change the frequency oe ee eye EN e Next Station to select the next station e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Disc Mode e Previous Track to play the previous track To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Play to play an Artist Name Playlist Name Album may say the following commands Name Track Name etc e Track to change the track Bluetooth Streaming BT Mode e Next Track to play the next track To switch to Bluetooth Streaming BT mode say Bluet
203. ant at 10 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if us ing your vehicle for any of the following police taxi X X fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter X x gt x lt gt x 160 000 5 100 000 es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 667 Mileage or time passed whichever comes first eisisisisisisis S S S Ss s e mm exe ELE ce tese e rex alalla sl RISS ris szt e OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o ololo 898 8 S8gsg S ss sis 8 8858 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Nloil ciw iw o ut oo Wwd oluvlo O T Gl olo Er YS SPS Sl Filal asa Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service X X X X X commercial service off road desert operation or more than 5096 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent X X trailer towing Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary X Change front and rear axle fluid if using your ve hicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer X X X towing 668 MAINTENA
204. approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 504 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals ee STARTING AND OPERATING 505 Term Definition Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall
205. are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints in this section of Occupant Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 7 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved 8 back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Continued 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Air Bag can cause death or serious injur
206. as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed Continued 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle your strongest bones will take the force in a colli will not protect you properly The lap portion could sion ride too high on your body possibly causing inter A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the you from injury during a collision You are more buckle nearest you likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not e A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt properly In a sudden stop you could move too far are meant to be used together forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a your seat belt snugly collision and leave you with no protection Inspect e A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re the vehicle in a collision increasi
207. ase one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm is successfully set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed To Disarm The System To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm you will need to push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the
208. astened either up or down e Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at all times when the windshield is down Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wipers side bars and all associated hardware and fasteners are cor rectly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents Continued vehicle In the event of an accident a loose door may cause personal injury Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars mark the original locations prior to removing 2 Remove the two top hex bolts 13 mm and the one side hex bolt 13 mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295 7 Remove the one hex bolt 13 mm visible through the plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar one hex bolt 13 mm on the side of the side bar and one hex bolt 13 mm on top of the side bar NOTE Pull side bar out horizontally when removing EN 036301723 3 Remove the sun visor 4 Remove the A pillar cap 5 Disconnect microphone if equipped with U
209. at the base of the connector and pulling down to disconnect Door Strap Harness Location 1 Wiring Harness follow the harness up and under the instru ment panel to the connector 2 Body Hook 3 Door Harness Strap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 4 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage the paint S 5 With the door open lift the door to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door NOTE Doors are heavy use caution when removing them To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order Rear Door Removal Four Door Models WARNING Door Removal Warning Label 1 Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage 0358001792 Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that 2 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and they can provide This procedure is furnished for use lower outside hinges using a T50 Torx head driver during off road operation only 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor 021733800 Trim Access Door 5 Unplug the wiring harness connector NOTE Squeeze the tab on the base of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the harness to be
210. ated Entty 2k mes 22 Immobilizer Sentry Key vessie nekea esi eras 16 Information Center Vehicle nnana aaan 341 Inside Rearview Mirror 002005 111 Instrument Cluster annaa auaa 308 Instrument Panel And Controls 307 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 639 Integrated Power Module Fuses 644 Interior Appearance Care lesse 637 Interior Lights eese mes 174 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 177 IntrodUchON uer 655740 54o 0b ae Es 4 Inverter Power 0 eee 188 iPod USB MP3 Control Bluetooth Streaming Audio 150 409 Jacking Instructions lille 574 Jack bocation uu pe ae RR Gok RR aCe nae 572 Jack Operation cs estis s erens gs sis 571 574 575 Jump Starting i4 eqs ded RR RU Ses wat we 578 Key In Reminder ge crestes nite be ede Se 16 Keyless Entry System s scc 2 0 6 eee setas 23 Key Programming 66 eee eee eee 18 Key Replacement rena naea eta E 17 KeyS3 stare arg Miedo a Ge oa e EEA 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 16 Lane Change Assist 2 2 0 ali aiani aie a aa 172 Lap Shoulder Belts c cs o crer csreceriscsad 52 Latches 515 2 3d eese heb sehen cute nee 104 Lead Free Gasoline 2 2 l l 537 Leaks Fluid 0 ee es 104 Life Of Lites 5o s yo CE eGo aes 521 Light Bulbs Eights ised sata ee Sieg ane aye Rage Whee TS Gee 104 169 Lights On Reminder 000 172
211. ating Tether Anchorages 4 There are tether strap anchorages behind each J rear seating position located on the back of the seat near the floor Tether Strap Anchorages Two Door Models N ot R70 022633862 m Tether Strap Anchorages Four Door Models LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage ER Center Seat LATCH Two Door WARNING This vehicle does not have a center seating position Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat Center Seat LATCH Four Door Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach ments in the center seating position Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions Child restraints with flexible webbing mounted lower attach ments can be installed in any rear seating position 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint
212. ation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 491 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the ESC Partial Off mode by pushing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the ESC Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pushing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING e When in ESC Partial Off mode the TCS function ality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illumi nated When in ESC Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Continued WARNING Continued e Trailer Sway control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the ESC Partial Off mode ESC Full Off This mode is entered by pushing and holding momen tarily pushing the ESC OFF switch for five seconds In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled Therefore the en hanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Full Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only 492 STARTING
213. ation Instructions DISC Mode For CD Connecting An External USB Device 404 ene Mie Wha Budiey VIS MIBROu qe Using This Feature 0 0 0 0 0000 0005 405 Notes ee MES NMA P A eiue dis Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device LIST Button DISC Mode For MP3 WMA Using Radio Buttons e sceme llli 406 UTEM PS 397 Play Mode TO Baten ae Mode FOr MES NMA List Or Browse Mode 00 407 PUGS A EE E MP eee 398 Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped 400 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 409 E UCONNECT 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 41 IF EQUIPPED cs c asus nad tid ede o ROSE 404 Radio Operation 000000 412 Operating Instructions CD Way CR oscar tos sop pa rales aces 412 Wate Command System IE Equipped 2445 men ipei DISC MAINTENANCE 2 ol 2o L od 412 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone E RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES 413 If Equipped sre RM xy Rs 404 ll AUX USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 404 Regulatory And Safety Information 413 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss BB CLIMATE CONTROLS 0005 415 Automatic Temperature Control ATC It Equipped sie ore dese aided pee 419 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 415 Operating Tips pne siess sirien eee 425 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 04010446
214. ay and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 545 Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading condition
215. aying the desired track when it is playing the track push the e SCAN button again During Scan mode pushing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or push the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pushing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device 408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display push the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just tur
216. based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill 626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is
217. be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 2 Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat Tolock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 7 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten t
218. buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Continued some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Al ways wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other
219. ce information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427 Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button _ _ VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between J and 2 Set the temperature control at zi to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the ms button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort WARM WEATHER Press the lt 5 button to turn recirculate off 5 If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 7 and turn the air conditioning on If WX eo it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 34 74 COOL OR COLD Press the lt gt button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between 2 and then turn the air be 856 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 6 tu apg the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between LS ana S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near J If itis sunny you ma
220. cess to an unlocked vehicle the vehicle e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission If Equipped Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or Apply the parking brake place the gear selector in others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the dren should be warned not to touch the parking vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock brake brake pedal or the gear selector ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 Four Wheel Drive Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This feature enhances off road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode Automatic Transmission If Equipped Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK position vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting Gasoline Engine NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressi
221. ch to setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Tutorial Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice Command button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Push the Voice Command button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be re peated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
222. channel at the rear corners of the vehicle 035801670 036067913 NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 5 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over 6 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so the Sunrider link to lock in the link Sunrider Models that they rest on top of the soft top only 035801675 A 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 Release the Sunrider latch both sides 8 Open the swing gate and lower the top NOTE Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle 035801679 s 7 0359044637 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top Refer to Raising The Soft Top in this section for further information 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation 035907427 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 Engage header latches 3 Install rear corner panels 035801670 4 Install the back window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 6 To install the side windows affix the window tempo rarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm 036033904 5 Install the side windows 8192618a 2
223. comes if your vehicle s systems are breached It may be possible that vehicle systems including safety related systems could be im paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death ONLY insert media e g USB SD card or CD into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source Media of unknown origin could possibly contain mali cious software and if installed in your vehicle it Continued ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 WARNING Continued may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached As always if you experience unusual vehicle be havior take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately NOTE FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach vehicle owners should Routinely check www driveuconnect com software update to learn about available Uconnect software updates Only connect and use trusted media devices e g personal mobile phones USBs CDs Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can not be assured Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent For further information refer to Onboard Di agnostic System OBD II Cybersecurity in Maintaining Your Vehicle 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR IN
224. commended The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419 The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging Automatic Temperature Control ATC If when the recirculation button is pushed and the mode Equipped control is set to panel or Bi Level e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled 045640031 Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Operation of the system is quite simple Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only Temperature Control Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will aut
225. connect phone 6 Open the sport bar Velcro covering L 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION WARNING You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the side bars from Do not remove the head impact foam from the side bars as damage to the foam may result the vehicle or securely store them as described or NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their original they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps 8 Remove the side bar assembly and reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 10 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the 9 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover remove the retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store them in the center console or securely behind the rear seat NOTE It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after the nuts have been removed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 11 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing
226. creases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search push the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio
227. ction Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search push the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pushing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time push and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type m
228. d Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present The gear selector is in the DRIVE position e Vehicle speed is sufficiently high The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance 452 STARTING AND OPERATING Se This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap the gear selector to the right or left while in the DRIVE position Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected
229. d filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission If Equipped The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Manual Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle If the fluid becomes contaminated with water it should be changed immediately Otherwise change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633 Transfer Case Adding Fluid
230. d in position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release but ton To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu pant it must be removed WARNING ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if when worn the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant s body is LESS than 6 inches Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed
231. d maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of FCA Ma terial Standard MS 90032 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant 624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system NOTE e It is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is ope
232. d reservoir take 0726034916 618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade perfor mance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619 WARNING CAUTION Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless
233. d tire pressure inflation value shown in the Inflate to XX message The system will automatically update the graphic display of 534 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A sys
234. d tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded Regular gaso 49 line having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the R M 2 method The use of higher octane Premium gasoline is not required as it will not provide any benefit over Regular gasoline in these engines While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87 hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern However if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound see your dealer imme diately Use of gasoline with an octane number lower STARTING AND OPERATING 537 than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Poor
235. d to the control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using an external USB device to connect to the USB port The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device 406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To enter the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either push the AUX button on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or push the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise b
236. d vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized d
237. dangerous Forces gener tow strap ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could Continued 584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage WARNING Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selec tor 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the gear selector override access cover located to the right of the gear selector 4 Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON RUN position but do not start the engine Gear Selector Override Access Cover 5 Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585 6 Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port and push and hold the override release lever down 7 Move the gear selector to the NEUTRA
238. des SCAN Button CD MODE Push the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Push this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Push and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pushed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM Or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395 Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maxi
239. ding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 3 After adjusting the hours push the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Push the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit push any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button
240. ditional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for proper closing latching
241. djust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Push the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit push any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level b
242. dow Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393 to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio
243. dow to disengage it from the zipper on the top Ba cover 0359041469 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely bracket on both the left and right sides unzip the window J 036033903 036007477 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge this step on the opposite side of the side window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle 2 N X NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 4 n 036067914 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift unless the hard top is being installed To remove the the top swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 035963570 036201711 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 15 Fold back the front section of the top pulling the 16 Fold the top
244. e Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off 544 STARTING AND OPERATING Se VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month D
245. e s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Push this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 042340030 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understan
246. e programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the rocker lever rearward unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle Child Protection Door Lock Function 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WINDOWS The top left switch controls the left front window and the Power Windows If Equipped top right switch controls the right front window The power window switches are located on the instru WARNING ment panel below the radio Push the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the window Never leave children una
247. e bulb straight from squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the the socket to replace back of the front fog lamp housing Front Side Marker 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front the housing and then connect the replacement bulb side marker socket CAUTION 2 Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamp 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the 1 Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light fae board Wale pulling the lamp eWay irom ihe housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE OUT od BOARD SCREWS AT ANY TIME 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn counterclock D wise then remove it from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer 1 Remove the spare tire im A emors 2 Remove the four screws holding the lens cover in
248. e communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power Unlock the power door locks Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON RUN to ignition OFF Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your 9 protection in a collision The Occupant Re N straint Controller ORC monitors the internal ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC posi
249. e incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Rear Head Restraints 2 Door Model The rear seat head restraints are not adjustable They can be removed to make it easier to take out the rear seat To remove the head restraint push the button on each of the two head restraint guides and pull upward on the head restraint Replace the head restraint before driving the vehicle with passengers in the rear seat To replace the head restraint insert the head restraint rods into the guides and push downward on the head restraint until locked Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on child seat tether routing WARNING e Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head restraints installed while passengers are occupying the rear seat In a collision people riding in this Continued WARNING Continued area without the head restraints installed are more likely to be seriously injured or killed A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants Follow the re installation instructions above prior t
250. e most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA US LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 FCA Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 673 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Puerto Rico And U S Virgin Islands Custo
251. e phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Push the Phone Se button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phone book For example the entry John
252. e positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior NOTE Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top 1 Remove the side windows 036005869 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se P 2 Remove the back window NOTE Start zipper from the right side to remove back window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 3 Release header latches from the windshield frame 4 Release the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle 035801670 NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft 6 Fold header rearward pulling the fabric to the rear 035963570 036067914 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 7 Release Sunrider latch both sides 035963572 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx 8 Open the swing gate and lower the top Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation 035963573 a NOTE Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle 036067
253. e restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the recommended viscosity and quality grades CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its WARNING Continued first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This n should be considered a normal part of the break in and It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people not interpreted as an indication of difficulty Rus 4 riding in the
254. e sinka Dra 484 Brake Control System Electronic 481 Brake Fluid a zv dp SE OE 659 Brakes ux ea ceu 3D US VERA xL 481 Brake System lees 481 627 Master Cylinder eee 627 Parking ssec res eeExE Ia e LEREY 3d 478 Warning Light ce ge aes 316 481 Brake Transmission Interlock sss 445 Bulb Replacement lees 651 653 Bulbs Light sus 9 RR LER EE 104 651 Calibration Compass ess asie ses Psese ien ea 339 347 Capacities Fluid amp ad be nlite Rit eR Ron d 656 604 INDEX ae Caps Filler Fuels dauerte Sie UU HEU EN dd 541 Power Steering 4 2 22 9 n s e ie eae ed 477 Radiator Coolant Pressure 624 Carbon Monoxide Warning 100 541 Cargo Light Sao ciara ees eret Gaia ane oka 175 Car Washes 343 233 4 6 4 8 dub ge oo Tow dried and 635 Cellular Phone s aiee erered eae eea eee 114 Center High Mounted Stop Light 655 Certification Label nnana aaau 544 Chains Tite 0 3 034 os traa bea xe dob er Y ES 523 Changing A Flat Tire 000 571 Chart Tire SZ ia eae m RR ads 501 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 594 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 100 Checks Safety co sse ieee n 100 Child Restraint ee coner RR ox e de 76 Child Restraints Booster Seats Child Restraints 2 quere em ees 76 Child Seat Installation llis 94 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt
255. e take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your Jeep vehicle best has factory trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully 6 INTRODUCTION A MISE EN GARDE MEME AVEC DES SACS GONFLABLES PERFECTIONNES LES ENFANTS PEUVENT ETRE TUES OU GRAVEMENT BLESSES ALA i nu UW SAC COURE LA MMNCUKTIEARRIGAE CHT LA RAC
256. e the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only Door Frame Installation Two Door Models If Equipped 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews 2 Setthe door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side behind the door opening side hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the rubber seal at the top of the windshield UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure knobs Repeat on the other side that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame Door Frame Installation Four Door Models If Equipped 0359044641 1 Install the rear door frame first 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side just behind the rear door opening 035801665 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position 3 Position the top of the door frame against the metal sport bar and push onto the side bar making sure not rubber seal at the top of the windshield to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 5 Carefully set the front of the front door fra
257. e to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never at tempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle down stream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passenge
258. ead driver Re cover and re zip the sport bar covers 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward c Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets NOTE To aid in reattaching the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a 130 Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug being careful not to cross thread the screws or overtighten CAUTION Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the screws if they are overtightened 5 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 6 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only NOTE A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up The Soft Top in this section DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport ba
259. ealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to dealer or by following the customer key programming match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
260. eat could cause serious injury TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Release both the hood latches AOAO S K 5 031333906 Hood Latch Raise the hood and locate the safety latch located in the middle of the hood opening Push the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle to open the hood You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031407547 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE aS Headlights And Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent This system automatically turns the headlights on or off for
261. ection Pushing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Push this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Push and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pushed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Push this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly mM selected track Push the SET RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the
262. ee 124 Manual Seat Height Adjustment List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook 124 It Bquipped ier cc ret wes 154 Phone Call Features 222r mes 125 Front Seatback Recline 154 Uconnect Phone Features 128 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat Two Door ius Models 2452905 228 eb Rb e ERRORS 155 Advanced Phone Connectivity 133 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models 156 Phone ue os peers IRE inpet er emn 135 Heated Seats If Equipped 158 General Information lile 146 Head Restraints 00040 160 ll VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED 146 Removing the Rear Seat Two Door Voice Command System Operation 146 MAGES icd qii eequistived iq aine 103 Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door a iia e ter oiii eRe ae d Models rest teet cer eh ead eei 165 Voice Training ise eR ex ERR Rcs 152 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door B SEATS suos dos T HER eee 152 Models 453 3o mE perge nas 166 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 ll TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 168 Interior Lights 12x or CER 174 B LIGHTS sos urhu E Ru PSOHEeTY9 E Vr 169 B WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 176 Multifunction Lever llle 169 Windsh
263. eed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new
264. eels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take Continued 528 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under
265. efer to Gear Selector Override in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle 588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly e Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case e Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward quirements can cause severe transmission and or direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case damage Damage from improper tow transfer case is in NEUTRAL N and the transmi
266. efilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill CAUTION NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive
267. efrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped Continued 608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Air Conditioning Filter Replacement A C Air Filter WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the vehicle is running or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN mode With the A C air filter removed and the blower operating the bl
268. ell phone dependent 2 To bring the call back from hold push and hold the Phone amp button until you hear a single beep Redial To redial the last number called from your mobile phone using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone amp e button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types 1 After the ignition is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 After the ignition is cycled to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone 3 An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Push the Phone Se butto
269. emember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED NOTE During cold weather you may experience in WARNING creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 1 3 5 2 4 6 R 810d6226 Shift Pattern Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply 440 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4to5 5 to 6 3 6L Accel 15 24 24 39 34 55 47 76 56 90 Cruise 10 16 19 31 27 43 37 60 41 66 NO
270. emote Start Abort Message On Electronic Battery at an acceptable charge level Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped RKE PANIC button not pushed The following messages will display in the EVIC if the A vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema System not disabled from previous remote start event turely Vehicle Security Alarm not active e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar NOTE Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar Remote planeada For security power window operation is disabled Remote olani Aborigd system Fault when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned m The engine can be started two consecutive times two to the ON RUN position eum p 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However To Enter Remote Start the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a Push and release the REMOTE START button third cycle O on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 programmed Then the engine will start and t
271. ems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621 Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and r
272. en to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic trans mission in PARK a manual transmission in RE VERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury E STARTING AND OPERATING 481 CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still func tion There will be some loss of overall braking effective ness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activati
273. er EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS IMPORTANT The warning indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes sage and or acoustic signal when applicable These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and or alternative to the information contained in the Owner s Manual which you are advised to read carefully in all cases Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication All active telltales will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Some telltales are optional and may not appear es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 Red Telltale Indicator Lights Battery Charge Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Battery Charge Warning Light This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a possible pr
274. eral miles kilometers at speeds iw greater than 30 MPH 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ee e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive e This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped g This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Front Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Front Axle Lock Indicator Light FRONT n Indicates when the front axle lock has been activated es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light REAR This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What
275. ere may be situations where the Hill Start Assist HSA will not activate and slight rolling may occur such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles people and objects and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve hicle under all road conditions Your complete atten tion is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration manually ac tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 487 WARNING Continued e If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings refer to e Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
276. ergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 Tire Tread 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 521 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 1 6 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replace ment e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life
277. ers or windows equipped with radio antennas Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639 When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild towel or cloth that you are using Do not spray cleaner soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the directly on the mirror belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic WARNING 1 Clean with a wet soft cloth A mild soap solution may frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and be used but do not use high alcohol content or leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts clean damp cloth Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt 2 Dry with a soft cloth assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they Seat Belt Maintenance have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners T
278. ervice so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera Vehicle Odometer Messages If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster all messages will display in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center If Equipped in this section for further information When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display e ECO door gATE LoW tirE e HOTOIL gASCAP noFUSE e CHAngE OIL ture HOTOIL Warning message illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warn ing message is illuminated and you continue operat ing the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 6 Software Telltales Hard and Soft Telltales Symbols appear based on specific behaviors 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 7 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Dis play Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Cent
279. ese conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pushed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Bi Level Floor or Mix and then push the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the 426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibil
280. esignation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 501 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in 502 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to i
281. ess this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system WARNING e ONLY an authorized service technician should con nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port such as a driver behavior tracking device it may Be possible that vehicle systems including safety related systems could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death e Access or allow others to access information stored in your vehicle systems including per sonal information For further information refer to Cybersecurity in the Understanding Your Instrument Panel section Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off 594 MAINTAINI
282. etractor immediately take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position After you release the anchorage button try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locke
283. etween the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD
284. fill 622 Inspection Points To Remember 000000 ee 626 Pressure Cap 4593 anco deb eiie end 624 Radiator Cap 44 erre o ree 624 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze 622 656 657 Corrosion Protection 0 0 0 00 eee eee 634 Cupholdersy sus Dire mr Miter te cbe RIS E 190 Customer Assistance 2 eee 671 Data Recorder Event reams e RE ae 75 Daytime Running Lights 174 Dealer Service 2l 595 Defroster Rear Window llle 300 Defroster Windshield 102 418 423 Delay Intermittent Wipers 00 177 Diagnostic System Onboard 592 Dimmer Switch Headlight 172 Dipsticks Oil ENGINE icta ded es eek eS ed Ea 597 Power Steering i retiran Seeds ia ak Rae uns 477 606 INDEX ees Disabled Vehicle Towing 2005 585 Disarming Security System tira 21 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 625 Door EO6KS 9 ei BE a Ee een eA y edes 38 Child Protection Door Lock Rear Doors 42 Door Locks 4 23 aped E POPE eU de tris 38 Key Hob coste d Satine tee Se nah eis 38 Remote abs ance ue at ESPERE rd RUM Chen 38 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 38 Door Locks Automatic 00 000 eee eae 41 DOOS eei 6 ddan es eX G EG eed de ceed 32 Driver s Seat Back Tilti soe kansana na ea eaa 154 DIVINE s ida ies acia ee Gta asa oes Se
285. flective coat ing removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES Under certain conditions the mobile device being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile device antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile device operation when not using Uconnect if equipped Regulatory And Safety Information USA CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits Nevertheless the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recom mendations which reflect the consensus of the scientific community 414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones However the use
286. g If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 523 WARNING Continued CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES approved for your vehicle may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body 5 capacity other than what was originally equipped clearance Follow these recommendations to guard on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load against damage index could result in tire
287. g the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing the PANIC button a second time you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pushed after four seconds push the RKE transmitter LOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the Flash Lights With Lock feature outside of the vehicle by pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the ignition key removed NOTE Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Ala
288. gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued 448 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always shift the transmission into PARK apply the parking brake turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be Continued WARNING Continued warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not
289. gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed e Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will generate an automatic downshift for improved acceleration when reasonable The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a e You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged NOTE When the transfer case is in the 4L Low range the transmission will shift automatically but no higher than the displayed gear To disengage AutoStick mode hold the gear selector to the right until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your
290. gerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift an automatic transmission into PARK shift a manual transmission into RE VERSE turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF mode the shifting out of PARK Continued 444 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued automatic transmission is locked in PARK secur ing the vehicle against unwanted movement e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehic
291. ghts csse RR Ree 172 654 Fog Light Service esee o RR em 654 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat 005 163 Folding Rear Seat llle 166 Folding Windshield liliis 293 Four Way Hazard Flasher 0 0 568 Four Wheel Drive 000000 cee eee 453 Operation acies ayn ese m donee need 453 Shifting cs via e eee s E E ne ee is 453 SYSTEMS on hea ae oe don S eqs d 453 Four Wheel Drive Operation 454 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 0 582 Front Axle Differential 00 634 Fuels ied ie en e ack ty s Dee toe ane eke aed 537 Addi g eien eta dei gedsaged E E 541 Additives 0 0 ce eens 539 Clean Alt iud e Lia wg ehh Rex ee EES 537 Ethanol ee oer ene ene are ities dae IU 538 Filler Cap Gas Cap cc recte sead mia Ree 541 Gasoline iai ek drea ek me i Le aa a 537 GaUpe cus ses SC en RU Pe LU Ie UR ET ee 322 Materials Added 0 0 0 0 cece eae 539 Methanol 4 ss 24 4 sede aged oa Gone neg eee 538 Octane Rating 0 0000 537 657 Requirements elles 537 656 Specifications scele 657 Tank Capacity os aesa p i eee 656 Fueling i222 e rs m eas 541 FUSES PCT 643 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 541 543 593 en INDEX 689 Gasoline Clean Air 0 0 cee 537 Gasoline Fuel secre ike RA Bad as as 537 Gasoline Reformulated l l 537 Gauges Fueli ersam oath Ee ei A eee ae Bh 322
292. gine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible
293. gnition Off Draw Climate Control System Under hood Lamp M12 30 Amp Green Amplifier M13 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw Cabin Compartment Node Wireless Control Module SIREN Multifunction Control Switch M14 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Export Only M15 20 Amp Yellow Climate Control System Rear View Mirror Cabin Compartment Node Transfer Case Switch Multi Function Control Switch Tire Pressure Monitor Glow Plug Module Export Diesel Only M16 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M17 15 Amp Blue Left Tail License Park Lamp M18 15 Amp Blue Right Tail Park Run Lamp M19 25 Amp Clear Auto Shut Down ASD 1 and 2 M20 15 Amp Blue Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light Switch Bank M21 20 Amp Yellow Auto Shut Down ASD 3 M22 10 Amp Red Right Horn HI LOW M23 10 Amp Red Left Horn HI LOW M24 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper M25 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Diesel Lift Pump Export Only M26 10 Amp Red Power Window Switch Driver Window Switch M27 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed Wireless Module M28 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module M29 10 Amp Red Powertrain M30 15 Amp Blue Wiper Motor Frt J1962 Diagnostic Feed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M31 20 Amp Yellow Backup La
294. h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 525 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling A E and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires C The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with E aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road ut E type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 055703771 Tire Rotation Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper B maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or CAUTION unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumference The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause shown in the following diagram Continued 526 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be f
295. h a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid 638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Direct contact of air fresheners insect repellents suntan lotions or hand sanitizers to the plastic painted or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage Wipe away immediately CAUTION Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrost
296. h a soft and slightly moist clean cloth When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated 642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M regularly Use MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggressively work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper teeth If a stuck zipper slide is experienced work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper slide Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may damage the windows ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643 FUSES WARNING Continued WARNING Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition When replacing a blown fuse always use an ap propriate replacement fuse with the same
297. h more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pushing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 Push the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX but
298. hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Knee Impact Bolsters with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the outboard side of the seats The SABs may help to reduce driver and front passenger and position the front occu He TOE OCS ant ipay HEURE esis In pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front gag tonite INC jury recu o pole
299. he body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge 035801686 035801685 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 9 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body 10 To install the side windows affix the window tem side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm the rear roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers 036067913 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 11 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door N channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 035905867 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 12 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2
300. he center portion of the lever upward to the next 031407549 detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Dimmer Control 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level when shifted into any position other than PARK auto trans mission or when the vehicle begins to move manual transmission NOTE The Daytime Running Light on the same side of the vehicle as the active turn signal will turn off auto matically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Interior Lights The overhead light will turn on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approxi mately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Courtesy Reading Lights Two courtesy reading lights are located in the bottom of the rearview mirror You can turn these lights on and off from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever These lights are also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System 031433063 Courtesy Reading Light Switches ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YO
301. he end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until 578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME each nut has been tightened twice For the correct lug NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and section If in doubt about the correct tightness have precautions them checked with a torque wrench by your autho rized dealer or service station CAUTION 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly other booster source with a system voltage greater seated against the wheel than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES alternator or electrical system may occur If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury so please follow the procedures in this section carefully WARNING WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579 Preparations For Jump Start WARNING The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the engine compartment behind the Power Distribution Center
302. he right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type b rie No program type or None undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls
303. he tether strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position located behind the top of the vehicle seat See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Restraint System for the location of ap proved tether anchorages in your vehicle WARNING Continued 0226047162 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
304. he vehicle 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Opening The Sunrider 3 Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves forward to unlock the Sunrider links 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame Lll iL m um 0359049773 035801677 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291 4 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift 5 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest the top the header on top of the rear portion of the deck y A 036007403 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 6 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as shown 7 Secure the top by using the two provided straps Each Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle 036007405 036067916 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293 Closing The Sunrider Perform the above steps in the opposite order NOTE Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the material to sag and may block the rearview mirror FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some accidents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other object
305. he vehicle e Any engine warning lamps come on will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle The hood is opened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 e The hazard switch is pushed e The transmission is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pushed To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 This device must accept any in
306. hen lean back to downward on the handle to lower the seat the desired position and release the handle Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position 0309063797 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat Two Door Models Pull upward on the recline lever toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the entire seat forward 0309063798 Easy Entry Lever 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The front passenger seats have a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models B 0 09 30 This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward m the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear Easy Entry Seat seats To return the seat to a sitting position rotate the seatback upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the track locks UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Driver s Seat Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument Pull upward on the recline
307. hicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure that the seats are fully latched Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door Models Reverse the steps for removing the seat WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door WARNING Models It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously NOTE injured or killed To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and Be sure everyone in
308. hicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control 520 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Em
309. his will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric 640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precautions Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak e After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top always make sure it is completely dry before lowering Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Win dows Washing Use MOPAR Car Wash or equivalent or mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use MOPAR Con vertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support the top from underneath Rinsing Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641 CAUTION Continued e The front panel s must be positioned properly to CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high pressure car washes as the
310. hnology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Continued CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Failure to use ATF 4 fluid may affect If Equipped the function or performance of your transmission We recommend MOPAR ATF 4 fluid Manual Transmission If We recommend you use MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant meeting the Equipped requirements of
311. hould ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits When avail able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom mended Visit www toptiergas com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers 540 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should CAUTION Continued be avoided Many of these materials intended for gum or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients These can harm fuel system gasket vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance and diaphragm materials A i The use of fuel additives which are now being Fuel System Cautions sold as octane enhancers is not recommended CAUTION Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is n
312. i Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423 e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost ov Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e Air Conditioner Control Push this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with 045638696 the Mode control dial Push this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically cont
313. icator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON 496 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is norma
314. id Storage 3 Open the rear compartment cover SE Rear Storage Cover DUAL TOP TWO DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top Two Door Models 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the following items e Right and left door frames Four door frame attachment knobs e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window Two rear window roll up straps e Two Sunrider secure straps if equipped Two rear swing gate brackets 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three 4 Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Re pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle moval in this section and store in a clean dry location 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket NOTE To aid in disconnecting the knuckles yo
315. ield Wiper Operation Headlights And Parking Lights 170 Intermittent Wiper System Automatic Headlights If Equipped 170 Windshield Washers lisse 178 Turn SIGNALS oases deik RS E VEEENEI Dawe 171 Mist Feature x esc iced Xs RARO DUE RR se 179 Lane Change Assist lees 172 WM TILT STEERING COLUMN 179 Lights On Reminder 3223 4 02 402 60 9 172 W ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL High Low Beam Switch isses 172 IE EQUIPPED ose osn Sedna p Oed dte d 180 Flash To Pass cae coerce gets wi L LLL ne J 172 To Activate cios e ete sona aed as aeta da 181 Front Fog Lights sees ees 172 TO SEE RENEGADE dudo diede ine Instrument Panel Dimmer 173 TOHDCRCHNIMS usc eGR yee PER diutius wee Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 174 To Resume Speed 0000006 182 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing E ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ll POWER IN VERTER IF EQUIPPED B CUPHOLDERS eeseeeeeen E STORAGE Glove Co Rear Stor Front Cupholders 0 0 Rear Cupholders 0000 mpartment s serene Console Storage Compartment age Compartment If Equipped ll DUAL TOP TWO DOOR MODELS IF EQ
316. ill be illuminated This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily push the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the ESC Partial Off mode by pushing the ESC Full Off switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the ESC Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pushing the ESC Full Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion The ESC will restore to normal ESC On mode after each key on WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 495 WARNING Continued reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys tem is reduced e Trailer Sway Control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light tel ee The ESC Activation Malfunction Ind
317. ill drop to the normal Hl evel If the HI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the num ber of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion Continued 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion in a seat that has been overheated could cause Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly serious burns due to the increased surface tempera adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or ture of the seat death in the event of a collision Head Restraints Front Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury To ra
318. imes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by ARNNG contact with chemicals They are not permanent and ass normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot significantly within a few days or if you have any protect you in another collision Have the air bags blistering see your doctor immediately seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme particles The particles are a normal by product of the diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller process that generates the non toxic gas used for air System serviced as well bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact if th
319. in After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phone book follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 e A maximum of 1 000 entries per phone will be down edited on the mobile phone The change
320. ing a hill in low range with clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION Failure to follow the maximum recommended down shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is pressed 442 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear Selection 6 to 5 5to4 4 to3 3 to 2 2 tol Maximum 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 Speed NOTE Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi cantly less Reverse Shifting To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicle to a complete stop Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the gear selector in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the gear selector into REVERSE The knock over provides a resistance to the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the trans mission into REVERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort ee STARTING AND OPERATING 443 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED WARNING CAUTION e It is dan
321. ing all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you push the Voice Command t button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a com mand NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists options push the Voice Command button listen for the beep and say your command Pushing the Voice Command button while the sys tem is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning blower is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To hear the first available Menu push the Voice Com
322. installation of replacement or equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the tion or sensor damage may result when using re TPMS from functioning properly Always check the placement equipment that is not of the same size TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS to continue to function properly sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and when ESC is activated It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven sev
323. ioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering 478 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely 054110749 Parking Brake Lever
324. ions es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627 Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Power Disc Brakes Disc brakes do not require adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid Contin
325. irius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www siriusxm com or at wwvw siriusxm ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on push the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401 Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Push any butt
326. is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment Lu 9 S n Plastic Wing Nut Location Spare Tire Removal To remove the spare tire from the carrier remove the tire Jack Storage cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug NOTE Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise wrench turning them counterclockwise to loosen the jack from the storage bin NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 85 Ibs 38 5 kg including the weight of the spare tire Preparations For Jacking 1 Park on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573 4 Shift the automatic transmi
327. is will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition 514 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Tire Pressures Fer High speed Operation tires could cause them t
328. ise the head restraint pull upward on the head by restricting head movement in the event of a rear restraint To lower the head restraint push the adjust impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top ment button located on the base of the head restraint and of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear push downward on the head restraint To remove the head restraint raise it as far as it can go 7 as then push the adjustment button and the release button The head restraints for all occupants must be prop at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the up To reinstall the head restraint put the head restraint vehicle or occupying a seat Head restraints should posts into the holes and push downward Then adjust it to the appropriate height Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment e ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants Follow the re installation instructions above prior to oper ating the vehicle or occupying a seat 1 Release Button NOTE Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees 2 Adjustment Button to th
329. ission must be placed in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for recreational towing CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground front or rear will cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground or OFF the ground using a vehicle trailer Tow only in the forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for recreational towing Continued 564 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Shifting Into NEUTRAL N CAUTION Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before WARNING recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging Press and hold the brake pedal the parking brake The transfer case NE
330. ity of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters Aside window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter servi
331. ixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of the engine block N Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate 0108006208 en INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 14 Ignition Key Removal liess 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 16 B SENTRY KEY Re eh Geos Dew ack oe 16 Replacement Keys lees 17 Customer Key Programming 18 General Information selle 19 ll VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IE EQUIPPED seerste ia piap 3 dad pane 20 Rearming The System sscan sea sencan ess 20 To Arm The System lille 20 To Disarm The System 21 E ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 22 E REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 1 EQUIPPED 2 iia ci arua deck ER se eases 23 To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate 23 Remote Key Unlock On First Push 24 O To Lock The Doors And
332. ke Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake BRAKE application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at United States the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake Canada booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should
333. ked Position 3 Release Tab 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Arm 2 To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm 3 Release Tab press the release tab on the wiper blade and while 614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 With the wiper blade disengaged remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm 0726033803 Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Arm 3 Release Tab 4 Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass Installing The Front Wipers 1 Lift the wiper arm off of the glass until the wiper arm is in the full up position 2 Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm 3 Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade 4 Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click 5 Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615 Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 2 Remove the wiper arm nut and gently rock the wiper 1 Remove the rear wiper arm pivot cap To access the arm while pulling towards you to remove wiper arm wiper arm nut from the stud 0726034914 0726034913 Rear Wiper Assembly Wiper Arm With Pivot Cap Removed 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Arm 2 Wiper Arm Nut 3 Wiper Blade 3 Wiper Arm 616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 To remove the wiper blade from the wiper a
334. kes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured or killed 472 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE Never back down a hill in NEU TRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always
335. ki E Putting Up The Soft Top x eek e 280 Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top 227 E SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top 231 IF EQUIPPED 5 eek eth Rr antaiia 289 Lowering The Soft Top 5 236 Opening The Sunrider 290 Raising The Soft Top 245 Closing The Sunrider 0 0 0 293 E FOLDING WINDSHIELD 293 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped 299 BATS eee ranea ab anal eo are ek ut Boe ee are 294 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 300 Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side BafSa veu Su DER adu alee hae is 297 E REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror Outside Mirrors 0304049206 To receive maximum benefit adjust the ou
336. l the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation b OFF The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control ESC in a reduced mode Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in Full Off mode if equipped Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects Continued es STARTING AND OPERATING 497 WARNING Continued or other
337. l vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 POWER STEERING system This noise should be considered normal and it The standard power steering system will give you good does not in any way damage the steering system vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability CAUHON in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical CAUTION steering capability if power assist is lost Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi fluid temperature and it should be avoided when tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering possible Damage to the power steering pump may effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during Occur parking maneuvers NOTE Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel service interval is not required The fluid should only be travel are considered normal and do not indicate that checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are there is a problem with the power steering system apparent and or the system is not funct
338. la E 462 Dual Top ssec eb sears basen 193 197 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 185 Electrical Power Outlets llle 185 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 113 Electronic Brake Control System Ls 481 Anti Lock Brake System 00 0 482 Electronic Roll Mitigation 496 Traction Control Systemi ss ss esie sea a ka i sd 488 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 180 Electronic Stability Control ESC 488 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 321 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 341 Emergency Brake sarsa goiana ayee a a eee 478 Emergency In Case Of JaChKin Gas sd tad ea a E IER ER 571 Jump Starting rsirre ar pisi eee 578 TOW Hooks erm nee RR eR aey as 583 Emission Control System Maintenance 594 Engine Air Cleaner sce ceed e a eae ee i 600 Block Heater lt t rgd c Recte cd 437 Break In Recommendations 99 Compartment Ji xig daca Rs gaa doh eae oe 591 en INDEX 687 Compartment Identification 591 Coolant Antifreeze 0 2 0 2 eee eee 657 Coolimg i enseserd de qe Pd e nd doe 621 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 100 541 Fails Io Start ss esas RR RR race d 436 Flooded Starting sa eran RR nd 436 Fuel Requirements illii 537 656 Jump Starting xe bh te ees ee mds 578 Oo ris ier su Acepta quat ae oe Se 597 656 657 Oil Change
339. lacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting And Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 453 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 559 WARNING CAUTION Continued Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping Stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for distance When towing you should allow for addi motoring safety could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirement
340. le Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured e Children should be warned not to touch the park ing brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF key removal position The key can only be re moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the transmission is locked in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the trans mission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped
341. le battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING Continued The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved r
342. le for more information 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 0226005479 0226072994 Latch Positions Four Door Models Latch Positions Two Door Models Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating poshon position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol H Top Tether Anchorage Symbol en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys tem once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center po sition using the inner LATCH lower anchor ages Yes 4 Door Model Only You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position The in ner anchorages are 19 inches 484 mm apart Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
343. leaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow the half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the loops on the windshield 4 Open the swing gate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls of the swing gate brackets will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top Ba cover 0359041469 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely bracket on both the left and right sides unzip the window A 036033903 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and
344. leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION Before moving the gear selector out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the gear selector could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion P e e When shifting into PARK firmly move the gear selec tor all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position P With brake pedal released verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These
345. lectronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlle
346. led in the vehicle do forward facing limit for the child seat should use a not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts because it can loosen the child restraint attach fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in in the vehicle by the seat belt the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause infant or child restraint It could come loose in a serious personal injury collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat bel
347. lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper opera tion Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Front Wiper Control CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent settings The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iia Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released and
348. lle 435 Engine Block Heater 0000 437 Engine Fails To Start 0000005 436 Manual Transmission lens 434 Remote 24g Soh ase ee AE Soa ee OE OSG 28 Starting And Operating 0 0 435 Starting Procedures ea iaga ed 435 Steering POWeF bone pede ESENE EEE EE 477 Tilt Coltmt 2S Ret ros RES es 179 Wheel Tilt 452 dace t RR RE 179 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 411 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 411 ror P PT 650 Storage Behind the Seat 0 0 192 Storage Vehicle ssa ra en csi 425 650 Storing Your Vehicle lille 650 Stuck Freeing ces bese ser nas 582 S nder uasa E ae AE are OA 254 289 Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag 64 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 460 Sway Control Trailer 00 2000 497 Swing Gate Rear css ese sace cR ee a oko 47 Synthetic Engine Oil ss ses ee cR 599 System Remote Starting de aers n ika 28 608 INDEX MMM Temperature Control Automatic ATC 419 Tilt Steering Column e eR res 179 Tip Start a ees Reha rete PER Rep aoo aeg d 435 Tire And Loading Information Placard 506 507 Tite Markings iae i cie eO X ER EE a 499 Ul LM 104 511 517 677 Aging Life Of Tires 000 521 Ait Pressufe 29 gos ad RE REST 511 I PER RT titers eee cit a ee Be 523 Changing iu oeste e hepar dente 571
349. located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety 676 IF YOU NE
350. lter Cover 1 Spring Clips 2 Air Hose 3 Clean Air Hose Clamp 4 Clean Air Intake Tube Bolts 5 Air Cleaner Filter Cover 6 Clean Air Intake Tube 602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Remove air hose and loosen clean air hose clamp then 3 Lift the ai air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter release the spring clips on the air intake cover Air Cleaner Air Hose 0726034906 Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 Air Filter Cleaner Cover 1 Spring Clips 2 Air Hose 2 Air Hose 3 Clean Air Intake Tube 3 Clean Air Hose Clamp 4 Clean Air Hose Clamp 5 Air Cleaner Filter MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603 4 Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation assembly NOTE Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element 1 Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface p facing downward 2 4 2 Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly X locating tabs i 3 Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to 4 amp the housing assembly and install air hose k N 4 Tighten air intake clamp and tighten air cleaner intake Air Cleaner Filter HIDE pos 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface 604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Accessory Drive
351. mand button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands and Local commands Universal commands are available at all times Local com mands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing The Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command te button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command fw but ton You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio AM to switch to the radio AM mode e Radio FM to switch to radio FM mode e Sat to switch to Satellite radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e USB to switch to USB mode Bluetooth Streaming to switch to Bluetooth Stream ing mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Radio AM e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In e Main Menu to switch to the main menu thi he followi is mode you may say the following comm
352. mation Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 267 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4 535 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 550 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 4WD Engine GCWR Gross Frontal Max GTW Max Trailer T gine Axle Model Combined Wt pun Gross Trailer Tongue Wt SEDEM Rating Wt See Note 3 6L Manual 3 21 Two Door 6 900 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Sport Model 3 130 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 91 kg AWD 3 6L Manual 3 73 Two Door 8 400 Ibs 25 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Sport Model 3 810 kg 2 32 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg AWD 3 6L 3 21 Two Door 6 900 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Automatic Sport Model 8 130 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 91 kg
353. me in the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 035801666 6 Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making 8 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front sure that the material for the side bar cover is not knob long knob Then install the middle knob short pinched by the door frame knob through the front and rear door frames and 7 Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top Spey tones P Ossie HEBR of the front of the rear door frame Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid water leaks 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mM 9 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other side Please visit the Owners Manual on your DVD for instructional videos CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunt ing or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow etc 1492590169 Tf the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top ee UNDERST
354. ment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself 596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed systems may void your warranty and could resultincivil Maintenance Schedule there are other components penalties being assessed against you which may require servicing or replacement in the future WARNING CAUTION You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not
355. mer Service Chrysler International Services LLC P O Box 191857 San Juan 00919 1857 Tel 787 782 5757 Fax 787 782 3345 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited 674 Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465
356. mps M32 10 Amp Red Airbag Controller TT EUROPE M33 10 Amp Red Powertrain Controller M34 10 Amp Red Park Assist Climate Control System Headlamp Wash Compass M35 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors M36 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet M37 i 10 Amp Red Anti Lock Brake System Electronic Stability Control Stop Lamp Switch Fuel Pump Relay M38 25 Amp Clear Lock Unlock Motors 650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may CAUTION When installing the Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Mod ule and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Remove Cartridge fuse J13 in the Power Distribution Center PDC labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD and store it in a safe location within the PDC Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more r
357. mum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio mM Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates Sampling S hr Frequency Bit Rate kbps P KHz
358. n the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually push the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls To turn on the power outlet push the switch once The indi cator light will illuminate Push the 035005849 switch a second time to turn the power inverter outlet off Power Inverter NOTE When the power inverter switch is pushed there The power inverter is designed with built in overload will be a delay of approximately one second before the protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded inverter indicator light turns ON the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e
359. n trol System J8 E J9 40 Amp Green PZEV Sec Motor Flex Fuel If Equipped J10 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Wash Relay Manifold Tuning Valve J11 30 Amp Pink Sway Bar J12 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower Motor Radiator Fan J13 60 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw IOD Main J14 40 Amp Green Rear Defroster J15 40 Amp Green Front Blower J17 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid J18 20 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module PCM Trans Range 646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J19 60 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan J20 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper LO HI J21 20 Amp Blue Front Rear Washer J22 Spare M1 15 Amp Blue Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Switch Stop Lamp Feed M2 20 Amp Yellow Relay Trailer Lighting Stop lamp M3 20 Amp Yellow Front Rear Axle Locker Relay M4 2 Amp Grey Clock Spring M5 25 Amp Clear Power Inverter If Equipped M6 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 1 Rain Sensor M7 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 2 BATT ACC SELECT M8 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat M9 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat If Equipped ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M10 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw Vehicle Entertainment System Satellite Digital Audio Receiver SDARS DVD Hands Free Module RADIO Antenna Universal Garage Door Opener Vanity Lamp M11 10 Amp Red I
360. n dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur extreme bottom position ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and activate the Panic Alarm from a maxi mum distance of 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 0213041463 Three Button RKE Transmitter 021340825 Four Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate Push and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver s door only or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the RKE transmitter 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx UNLOCK button is pushed the Illuminated Entry will 2 Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button initiate and the turn signal lights will flash twice Remote Key Unlock On First Push This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s side or all doors and swing gate on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
361. n the i PARK position A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as 2 Push and hold the RESET button for approximately buildings bridges underground cables railroad 10 seconds until the current variance zone number is tracks etc displayed a e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the center of the instrument panel This is where the compass sensor is located 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the digits will go blank while the history information is erased The averaging will restart when enough new distance and fuel data is accumulated e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START positions The elapsed timer displays minutes seconds After 59minutes 59seconds it displays hours minutes seconds Trip Conditions Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equi
362. n the following is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is page for the required maintenance intervals operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM s This type of vehicle use is considered Severe At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Duty Change Indicator System Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Sao e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator e Check engine oil level e Check windshield washer fluid level system turns on e e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual required wear or damage e Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake with dipstick master cylinder power steering and automatic trans mission and fill as needed e e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake Check function of all interior and exterior lights 664 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Maintenance Chart Change Indicator System Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Inspect engine cooling system protection and pages for the required maintenance intervals hoses e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions e Inspect all do
363. n the gate handle 021834613 Gate Handle NOTE Close the rear flip up window before attempting to close the swing gate hard top models only 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the rear flip up window as damage to the blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are oper ating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags e Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat 2 If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 3 Children that
364. n the rear fasteners knobs located on the over head speaker bar assembly counterclockwise until they can be removed 035707352 3 Turn the center L shaped locks two from the center of the roof panel yi s 035707351 4 Turn the rear L shaped lock located above the shoul 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the der belt anchorage windshield 035701649 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 035707353 6 Remove the left hand panel To remove the right panel follow the steps above except for Step 3 Freedom Top Storage Bag Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular Hard Top come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to store your Freedom Top panels The storage bag contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are facing downward Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and fold it back NOTE Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the latches facing downward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 035707990 035707991 Unfold the black panel divider ensure the divider is Insert the left side Freedom panel into the bag with the laying flat Secure the Velcro located at the center of the latches facing upward oe N
365. n the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track push the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device e Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and push the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409 track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device WARNING sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device while driving Failure to follow this warning device could result in an accident CAUTION Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA EB Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any Uconnect phone system supp
366. n to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Push the Phone amp button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say WARNING Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency This feature is supported in the U S Canada and your mobile phone must be Mexico e Turned on NOTE e Paired to the Uconnect System Have network coverage e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Roadside Assistance Towing Assistance Canada and 060 fo
367. n vehicle audio volume Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incoming and Missed Calls Voice Text Reply connec e re rse ew me e ur Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on yo phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Push the Phone Ve button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Push the Phone We button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Messages You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 To send a message push the Voice Command button 9 Call me later Pd the system is listing the message and say 10 Thanks Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or 1y ae yon Hn DS aes number of the person you wish to send the message to 12 I am on my way List of Preset Messages 13 TII be late Yes 14 Are you there yet
368. na podadig SUL Air Bags seat belts and body structure WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band F radios etc 022633807 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs that are located in the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Location outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 When the SAB if equipped with SABs deploys it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback s trim cover The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury SABs if equipped with SABs are designed to activate in certain side impacts The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the deployment of the SAB
369. nd a three character extension nn Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multi session disc formats are supported by the radio Multi session discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multi session discs The use of multi session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Supported MP3 File Formats ERG Sampling The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten Specificati Frequency Bit Rate kbps pecification sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 kHz extension may cause playback problems The radio is MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will Layer 3 192 160 128 not play the file 112 96 80 64 When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 56 48 40 32 an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 following table are supported In addition variable bit Layer 3 112 96 80 64 rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files 56 48 40 32 use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or 24 16 8 VBR bit rate ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title
370. ne where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing 040506040 Compass Variance Map To Set The Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Push and hold the RESET button on the steering wheel for approximately ten seconds until the current variance zone number is dis played To change the zone push and release the STEP ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 button to increase the variance one step Repeat as 3 Release the RESET button then push and hold again necessary until the desired variance is achieved for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program the display ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat off The compass will now function normally ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected NOTE Manual Compass Calibration 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission i
371. ned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer Continued 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Continued remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 5 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area e The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button for further information U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If they cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair s
372. ng head and neck placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify injury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder replaced after a collision bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap A A Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt 4 Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and across your hips below your abdomen To remove chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfort slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder able and not resting on your neck The retractor will belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch withdraw any slack in
373. ng or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident shift the trans mission into a lower gear with 4L Low engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to
374. ng the accelerator pedal Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 22 F Or 30 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 436 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Continued WARNING to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire If the engine fails to start after you have followed the causing serious personal injury Normal Sta
375. ng to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391 Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at
376. nning for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle The fuel filler cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle Continued 542 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Continued into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermar ket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING 056801783 e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the Fuel Filler Cap vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities Continued Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 543 WARNING Continued A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full
377. nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emiss
378. nt applies to all radio frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors swing gate and ignition for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals when alarming The horn will sound the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeat edly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the differences in the horn In c
379. nt equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 294 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 Ibs 294 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 eee STARTING AND OPERATING 509 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg 510 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ibs Occupant 3 160 Ibs 865 ibs a Wus Wero I 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WE
380. ntly In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Push the Phone amp e button to accept the call To reject the call push and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Push the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call push the Voice Command button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call
381. nuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart 678 significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A
382. o access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can push the Voice Command button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can push the Voice Command button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then push the Voice Command button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e
383. o fail You could have a The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi maximum capacity at continuous speeds above tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high 75 mph 120 km h speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 515 Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than a 1 4 of an inch 6 mm Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run
384. o move to the next randomly selected track Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn Level 1 12 including a separator a
385. o oper ating the vehicle or occupying a seat NOTE Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Rear Head Restraints 4 Door Model a The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head re straints Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on child seat tether routing Removing the Rear Seat Two Door Models NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats 0309041467 Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and Rear Seat Rel positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold PP MEME down easily 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback forward 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Push down on the release bar on each side and pull the seat out and away from the lower bracket 4 Remove the seat from the vehicle Folding Rear Seat WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in the forward MT Rel Bar Locati tumble position The seat must be latched to all floor uide ccc attachments when the vehicle is in motion ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a ve
386. oblem with the electrical system or a related component If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a A chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Oil Pressure Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the ql vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Brake Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Bra
387. ode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Push the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice 404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Every time a preset button is used a corresponding AUX USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED PUSIOD ner walle play This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged Buttons 1 6 into the USB port located in the center console
388. of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge N 036005872 036201720 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side 12 To install the side windows affix the window tem channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear porarily by attaching it to the Velcro in the upper rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in roof bow 4 bow will aid in reaching the channel with 2 5 cm the retainers amp TE N 8192618a ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285 13 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 035905867 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 036007406 E 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 14 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side
389. of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset button CD Player Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged e g scratched re
390. of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments such as aboard airplanes If you are unsure of restrictions you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE e This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation e If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415 Con
391. ollowed to balance tire wear TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 0 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard
392. omatically make the adjustment 045638695 You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72 F 22 C for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation Pushing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421 insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance e While operating in AUTO the system will not auto matically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield The defrost mode must be manually se lected to clear the windshield and side glass Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to the AUTO po
393. on Enter Name Number Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Location Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Toggle Confirmation Prompts on off New phone Select a language wil English Espanol temporarily ot Francais ay 4 digit stem override pin code Phones phone priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero all one call two cancel three four five confirmation prompts continue delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star English plus erase all pound add location Espanol Francais help ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s home redial language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones mobile mute mute off send set up towing assistance phone settings or phone set u
394. on SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Dolby Push the TIME button to change the display from elapsed Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories playing time to time of day The time of day will display Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby for five seconds Laboratories RW FF Auxiliary Mode Macrovision p No function This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection No function technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited SET Button Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details DTS ing I i Ph If veer Ahing Magbabasa AEICORRESETEGONE DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater quipped Systems Inc Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details 400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Uconnect Saiellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is S
395. on hold push the Phone amp ebutton until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold push and hold the Phone Xe button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold push the Phone Se button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold 1 Push and hold the Phone amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling push the Voice Command button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established push and hold the Phone amp button until you hear a double beep indi cating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Call Termination To end a call in progress 1 Momentarily push the Phone button e Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is c
396. on of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control system EBC This system includes Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Traction Control System TCS Electronic Stability Control ESC and Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC and Hill Descent Control HDC 482 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD This function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle Brake System Warning Light The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Brake System Warning Light
397. on on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Satellite Mode Push the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another sele
398. one amp e button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted NOTE e Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Push the Phone Se button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list push the Voice Command t button during the playing of the de sired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call The selected number will be dialed en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Curre
399. ont grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring 6 Remove the lamp from the collar 7 Grasp the bulb and turn 1 4 turn counterclockwise 8 Pull the bulb from the housing 9 Push connector locking tab to the unlock position 10 Remove connector from bulb 11 Push connector onto new bulb base and push the connector locking tab to the lock position CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 12 Reinstall bulb housing Rotate the bulb 1 4 turn clockwise 654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Park Turn Signal Front Fog Lamp 1 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the 1 Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove fog lamp 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side 2 Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front and working toward the other fog lamp connector receptacle 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise 3 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and and remove from housing Pull th
400. ont passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti vating BeltAlert NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with out board front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags In a collision you and your passengers can
401. ooth Streaming In this mode you may say the Previous Track to play the previous track following commands e Main Menu to switch to the main menu USB Mode To switch to USB mode say USB In this mode you may say the following commands Play to play the current track e Pause to pause the current track Next Track to play the next track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Memo Mode To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may push the Voice Command button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may push the Voice Command button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo Delete All to delete all memos Setup To switch to system setup you may say one of the following Change to setup e Switch to system setup e Main menu setup e Swit
402. or latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 665 wheel disc brakes Mileage or time passed whichever comes first eisisisisisisis S S 3 s 8s So SSS Sa SS Sa Sle Ss la l ela aov aloeR els 9r sas zm Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers oo e ele 8j 8glsls Ss Sslls s 8858 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 o vY oovolor PSS Sl S S alalsa Additional Inspections Inspect the CV Universal joints X X X X Inspect front suspension tie rod ends and replace if necessary x 5 X d Inspect the front and rear axle fluid X X X X Inspect the brake linings replace as necessary X X X X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four X X X X Inspect transfer case fluid X X X Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X 666 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Mileage or time passed whichever comes first 110 000 140 000 Or Years Or Kilometers 48 000 30 000 80 000 50 000 112 000 70 000 144 000 90 000 208 000 c5 130 000 rs 240 000 5 150 000 176 000 x 32 000 20 000 64 000 40 000 x 96 000 gt 60 000 X lt 128 000 80 000 x 192 000 120 000 gt lt 224 000 Replace air conditioning cabin air filter Replace spark plugs Flush and replace the engine cool
403. orted device anywhere in the vehicle in ex treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam age the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons e Placing items on the iPod or external USB device To enter BISA mode push either AUX button on the or connections to the iPod or external USB device p in the vehicle can cause damage to the device radio or push the VR Webutton and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio and or to the connectors Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for further information on Bluetooth connectivity 410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Play Mode When switched to BISA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting A Different Audio Device 1 Push the Phone amp e button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and following the beep say Setup then say Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list the audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or push the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN bu
404. ot the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 541 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine ru
405. ou will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Push the Phone amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Call by Saying a Name e e e Push the Phone Xe button to beg
406. ouch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 3 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with Sub Woofer Opt 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie mobile phones etc Eventually if lugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will CAP sufficiently to degrade battery life and or POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED prevent the engine from starting There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers front of the center console to convert DC current to AC vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the current This outlet can power cellular phones electron battery even more quickly Only use these intermit ics and other low power devices requiring power up to tently and with greater caution 150 Watts Certain high end video game consoles will e After the use of high power draw accessories or exceed this power limit as will most power tools long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged i
407. our Instrument Panel for further informa tion Calibrate Compass Push the RIGHT arrow button to calibrate the compass Tire Pressure If Equipped Push and release the MENU button until Tire PSI kpa displays in the EVIC It shows a graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor mation This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC working with its suppliers evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed Similar to a computer or other devices your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and perfor mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys tems The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist even if the most recent version of vehicle software such as Uconnect software is installed WARNING e It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible out
408. our active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off 530 STARTING AND OPERATING Se when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault Tire location will be displayed as follows can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 4 5 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles not equipped with EVIC will inform the driver which tire s
409. overloading and failure e Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as You could lose control and have a collision recommended by the traction device manufacturer Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control Install on Rear Tires Only P225 75R16 or a P235 65R17 tire with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type Class S specification is recommended 524 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses WARNING CAUTION Continued e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the ment Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision following precautions Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating tween tires and other suspension components it is speed and conditions for use Always use the important that only traction devices in good condi suggested operating speed of the device manufac e Because of restricted traction device clearance be turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km
410. ow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in the Mainte nance Schedules section for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement Gasoline Engine Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown in the Maintenance Schedule Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1 Remove the bolts from the air cleaner intake tube Air Cleaner Fi
411. ower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes resulting in personal injury The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment Perform the following procedure to replace the filter 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the two lower the door air filter access doors to the HVAC housing Glove Compartment Air Filter Retaining Tabs 1 Glove Compartment Travel Stops 1 Left Retaining Tab 2 Glove Compartment 2 Right Retaining Tab 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward 5 Open the two air filter access doors 610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 6 Remove the two particulate air filters from the HVAC 7 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position air inlet housing Pull the filter elements straight out of indicators pointing in the same direction as removal the housing one at a time CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Close A C Air Filter access doors and secure retaining tabs 9 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Air Filter Acces
412. p new entry transfer call no Uconnect Tutorial other voice training pair a phone work phone pairing pairing yes phonebook phone book previous record again 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation gt The Uconnect Voice Command system allows 4 VR you to control your AM FM radio disk player USB mass storage class device iPod family of devices Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device satellite radio and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions follow
413. p try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momen tum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use second gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position to maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy area
414. p on the switch briefly To partially open the window push halfway to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Window Lockout Switch Four Door Models The window lockout switch located between the front window switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE console To disable the window controls push the win Rear Power Windows Four Door Models dow lockout button downward To enable the window controls push the window lockout button upward H The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console Push the switch down ward to open the window and upward to close the window Window Lockout Switch ES Rear Power Window Switches Four Door Models en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting the window opening REAR SWING GATE The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the swing gate push the button o
415. parking light operation Turn to the second detent for according to ambient light levels To turn the system on headlight operation turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position third detent When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System off turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position 031407548 Headlight Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights EE 4 031407553 Headlight Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic mode 031407551 Turn Signal Operation 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times
416. ped e This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It
417. perating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking ee STARTING AND OPERATING 561 If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the trans mission fluid and filter as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing AutoStick If Equipped e When using the AutoStick shift control select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as neces sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System
418. position tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an and remove the first key authorized dealer E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Inserta blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flash ing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Key less Entry RKE transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro grammed General Information The following regulatory stateme
419. pped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Push and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Push and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving mH in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 040563323 Trip Display Button Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 041041987 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Compass Heading N S E W NE NW SE SW Outside Temperature F or C ECO Display Digital Speedometer Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped Elapsed Time Vehicle Info EVIC Units Selection System S
420. pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned OFF ee STARTING AND OPERATING 527 NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours air pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is suffi ciently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wh
421. pters The front power outlet is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls and is powered from the ignition switch Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Front Power Outlet When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used in the power outlet it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heat ing element do not hold the lighter in the heating position 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE A second power outlet is located inside the center console On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer there is a and is powered directly from the vehicle battery third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty 041504527 Rear Power Outlet If Equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not t
422. q ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Rubicon 4 173 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg Model 4WD 3 6L 3 73 Four Door 9 200 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Rubicon 4 173 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg Model 4WD 3 6L 4 10 Four Door 9 200 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Rubicon 4 173 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 158 kg Model 4WD Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds STARTING AND OPERATING 555 NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo ie the GVWR and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting And Operating for further information Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers 556 STARTING AND OPERATING Se SS e ees Hur e e trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional CAUTION factory installed options or dealer installed options must e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle 805
423. r llle 40 Lubrication Body sse see em 611 Lug Nuts a 20095 hrsg EA E Re de 569 Maintenance Free Battery 000004 605 Maintenance Procedures 0 000000 596 Maintenance Schedule 000000 eee 662 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 324 594 Manual Service sa mau runana a a a eee 676 Manual Transmission 0 438 632 Fluid Level Check 0 000000 00 0 632 Lubricant Selection 0005 632 659 Shite Speeds 2s ese sash chau RR oes 439 Master Cylinder Brakes 00 627 Methanol esee ooo Gh PEE 538 Mini Trip Computer sss 336 345 IMGETORS 5 uus acm Sateen ace aes SO RUE NOSE RUE RU 111 Automatic Dimming ces es sas seres sane seas 112 Electric Powered 0 0 0 cee eee eee 113 Electric Remote 0 llle 113 Heated ie gs cic ed duke pds wR ek vis 114 Outside cepengi e BSS he de o Bo ee ee e 111 Rearview xo aswapbe bak ee EORR a b eed es 111 Vanity cat aa ean fee waa Eee ea a dd 114 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Modular Hatd Tops 2002444 Re 0 205 Monitor Tire Pressure System 526 MOPAR Parts ver garde ave oa ea a peres 595 675 MIBE EUBE osia a 3 4 es he x pa ee Ede pu 538 New Vehicle Break In Period 0 99 Occupant Restraints 6 6 eee ee 48 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 537 657 Oil Change Indicator llle 351 Oil Change
424. r T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control ee STARTING AND OPERATING 519 Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the ve
425. r The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently Removal is 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top Four Door Models 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the following items e Right and left door frames e Six door frame attachment knobs e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window Two rear window roll up straps e Two Sunrider secure straps if equipped Two rear swing gate brackets 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Re moval in this section 3 Ensure the tether strap is secure to the pivot bracket Unbutton the side bow tether strap both sides 4 Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle slide the tether strap up the side bow both sides ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 036072288 5 The tether strap must be hooked onto the pivot 6 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket bolts bracket prior to removal of soft top from vehicle both two per side from the sport bar using a 10 0 mm sides wrench or socket driver 7 Lift the soft top in a upward motion to release the pivot bracket
426. r Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area Push the Phone Se button to begin If you need roadside assistance e If supported this number may be programmable on After the Ready prompt and the following beep say some systems To do this push the Phone amp ebutton Towing Assistance and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE You should program the desired Towing Assis tance phone number using the Voice Command system To do this push the Phone amp e button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance When prompted say 1 800 521 2779 for U S Canada say 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone t
427. r child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 3 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position 4 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 5 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child
428. ra aerun 627 Headlamp ee sera aee a n a E 653 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 628 Front Park Turn Signal 654 Clutch Hydraulic System Front Side Marker llle 654 Manual Transmission If Equipped 632 Front Fog Lamp ecis inn eed ee 654 Manual Transmission If Equipped 632 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Transfer Case 40 69 423 4 04 20 Y acm edd 633 Lamp skip xe eR E E ed ag 655 Front Rear Axle Fluid 634 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 655 Appearance Care And Protection From FLUID CAPACITIES ng 5 cmt aw sateen ee 656 COFfOSIOIL 5x3 dase tpi ere ey eA Bed 634 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE B FUSES 2cv x esu Red rto ee nee eye 643 PARIS cy 2s sathet eget weeds pEi EE US 657 Totally Integrated Power Module 644 Engine ses n e RR e mede 657 B VEHICLE STORAGE 424p rx EE RR 3 aed 650 CHASSIS sacr iniaeeai cr aced E ER cac d 659 M REPLACEMENT BULBS 651 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 074468911 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Battery 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Automatic Transmission Dipstick Under Engine Cover 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Engine Oil Fill 11 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Brake Fluid Reservoir 592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION
429. rames Refer to Door Frame in this section 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5 Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport bar bracket 6 Install the pivot bracket bolts back into place using a mounting tab in a downward motion to lock into tab 036072291 10 0 mm wrench or socket driver Secure them until they are snug being careful not to cross thread the screws or overtighten es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 CAUTION 8 Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle remove the tether strap from the bracket hook by sliding strap up Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the off hook and slide down the side bow both sides screws if they are overtightened 7 Remove the tether strap from the pivot bracket 036072292 036072288 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 9 Button the side bow tether strap both sides SN iN V 036067907 ee 10 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 11 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only NOTE A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 12 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up The Soft Top in this section ee UNDER
430. rated Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING Do not open hot engine cooling system Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625 WARNING Continued build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol
431. re pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display the Inflate to XX message and a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash 536 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active roa
432. rear edge of the side window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle that they rest on top of the soft top A 035801675 A 036067913 NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14 Completely release the latches from the loops on the unless the hard top is being installed To remove the windshield frame If your vehicle is not equipped swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket with the Sunrider package proceed to Step 15 forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 035801677 035801676 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 15 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over 16 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sunrider the Sunrider link to lock in the link Sunrider Models Models only only 035801679 17 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the top folding it toward the rear of the vehicle 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
433. restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Child restraint anchorages are designed to with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description under Occupant Restraints for ad ditional information on ALR
434. rm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key in Things To Know Before Start ing for further information If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components F Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 021432709 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE General Information REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license e
435. rm grasp the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm NOTE Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap 0726034915 Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 Wiper Arm 2 Wiper Blade MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617 4 Still grasping the wiper blade move the wiper blade Installing The Rear Wiper away Hog the wIpst arni a disengage 1 Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place 2 Install wiper assembly back on the wiper stud at it s original position and gently tighten nut 3 Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the WisspERdOR Apion Woerd rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid oc a a A ae reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to 1 Wiper Blade i i 2 Wiper Blade Pivot Pin check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir 3 Wiper Arm Receptacle with windshield washer solvent only not radiator anti 4 Wiper Arm freeze When refilling the washer flui
436. rol recircu CX amp 5 lation However pushing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recircu lation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if in defrost mode Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog push the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode Attempting to use recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425 Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation mode by pushing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When th
437. rom your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa push the Voice Command t amp button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Push the Phone Xe button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced push the Voice Command mbut ton and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e e Push the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e
438. roperly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must be properly re strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING e SABs need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the SABs during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Relying on the SABs alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The SABs work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions SABs won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have SABs NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious to you but they will open during air bag deployment If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye collisions This does not mean something is wrong with irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or the air bag system throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The air bag material may somet
439. rous for a number of reasons A child or NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil is used to lock or unlock the doors swing gate glove dren should be warned not to touch the parking compartment and console storage brake brake pedal or the gear selector Continued 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks If Equipped The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Push the switch forward to lock the doors and rearward to unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch WARNING e For personal security reasons and safety in a colli sion lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren
440. rs at risk of injury or drowning After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage 476 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusua
441. rting or Extreme Cold Weather proce Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine is flooded engine has started ignite and damage the converter CAUTION and vehicle To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If
442. rument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations facing child restraint 022633796 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle 2 Driver and Passenger Knee Impact Bolster with a rear seat 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
443. s Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protec tion these structural elements can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on road driving Both you and your passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors If you choose to remove the doors see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on road use 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued If you remove the doors store them outside the WARNING Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury Do not drive your vehicle on road with the wind shield down Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is securely f
444. s Trailer Lights And Wiring tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision The Trailer Tow Package will include a four pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles CAUTION wiring harness If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 453 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustration Continued 560 STARTING AND OPERATING Seq m Four Pin Connector 057003766 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE you can use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear while o
445. s often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for WARNING Continued as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint All children whose weight or height is above the After a child restraint is instal
446. s Door Open 1 Air Conditioning Filter Access Door 2 Air Conditioning Air Filter es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove s
447. s are trans loaded and updated every time a phone is connected ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next to the Uconnect Phone phone connection Depending on the maximum number of entries down Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion for use e Push the Phone amp button to begin e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say phone is accessible Phonebook New Entry e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom book mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or Iristen ot Bab deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into th
448. s or dunes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and han dling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pave ment or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle 468 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Using A Spotter There are man
449. s up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving 546 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
450. se areas are more likely to be seriously SAFETY TIPS injured or killed Transporting Passengers Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO belts AREA Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon Continued monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Continued eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained en
451. seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position Two Door Models 0226072908 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 0226072909 Four Door Models e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still
452. set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery n UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp auxiliary power outlets that can provide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet ada
453. should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically PA when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer The auto door lock feature is enabled disabled in the Uconnect Settings Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit If Equipped The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled 2 The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h and the transmission gear selector is in NEUTRAL or PARK 3 The driver door is opened 4 The doors were not previously unlocked 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Push the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of th
454. sition In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individually selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic TUM REY Control Opera Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to knobs for comfort 0456006222 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel A Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear B
455. so that the material forms a W as fabric rearward Gently rest the header on top of the shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into rear portion of the deck two folds 036067915 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 17 Release the side bows by pushing down on the latch slide the top along the door frame track to the rear above the front of the rear door Push the top door frame rearward to disengage Repeat this step on the other side 036067912 19 Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track and lower the top down into the vehicle 035963572 18 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Grasp the folded side bows and NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 21 Once the top is fully down use the Velcro straps provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the body 035963573 EA 20 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 036201715 22 Close the front header latches 23 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Putting Up The Soft Top NOT
456. sors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings l The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message for a mini mum of five seconds An Inflate to XX message and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing will also be displayed Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR STARTING AND OPERATING 533 INFLATE TO 33 m s 33 33 33 0558008435 Tire Pressure Monitor Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended col
457. ssion into PARK or a manual transmission into REVERSE 5 Turn the ignition to LOCK 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For ex O ample if changing the right front tire L block the left rear wheel LN 0606506152 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be
458. ssion is ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited in PARK for automatic transmissions or in gear NOT Warranty in NEUTRAL for manual transmissions Refer to Rec reational Towing in Starting And Operating for de tailed instructions MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 591 E ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 592 Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II Cybersecurity mieste cmspa Oed aK 592 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 593 E EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 222 52akkrxxd end 4 E EGER da 594 B REPLACEMENT PARTS ivdeusga hm gs 595 l DEALER SERVICE s s do order Ree 595 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 596 Engine Oil i see eee eds 597 Engine Oil Filter cero Eee d 600 Engine Air Cleaner Filter sius 600 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication llle 611 Windshield Wiper Blades 611 Adding Washer Fluid 617 Exhaust System 0000000000 618 590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System eseese mee ayn dian dee d 621 M BULB REPLACEMENT iex een 653 Brake System oe enega andu
459. stem is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 485 WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent collisions in
460. stowed with the valve stem facing the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Connect the jack handle driver to the extension then to the lug wrench AIL T 4 Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the LL vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is Jack Warning Label fully engaged CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from the stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is y still on the ground i Front Jacking Location 576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME JA Va WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the 060539333 wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise WARNING Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack
461. straint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Restraint System 9 X Anchor Tether LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following tab
462. suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued WARNING Continued Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
463. sult the dealer or an experienced radio technician The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of for help outer rotary dials and inner push knobs CLIMATE CONTROLS Blower Control The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O 045607539 OFF position There are seven blower speeds Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 045607535 Manual Temperature Controls 416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Temperature Control 045607540 Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Air Conditioning Control T 045607557 Push this button to engage the Air Con ditioning A light will illuminate when the
464. surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum sta been lowered Failure to follow this warning may bility result in serious injury ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alter nate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for correct lug nut torque 10 Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at t
465. t in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Re
466. t in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 You should now be able to drive out following the trench CAUTION you just created at a 45 degree angle Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter WARNING than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Getting High Centered Crossing Logs If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes 470 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Winchi
467. t website for sup ported phones For Uconnect customer support e U S residents visit UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 24 hours a day 7 days a week e Canadian Residents visit UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French Mon Fri 8 00 am 8 00 pm ET e Sat 9 00 am 5 00 pm ET e Sun Closed Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
468. tatus and Warnings Door Ajar etc Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 The system allows the driver to select information by e MENU Button pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering Push and release the MENU button to advance wheel MENU the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu features or to return to the Main Menu from a sub menu Upon reaching the last item in the Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button push and release e COMPASS Button A Push and release the COMPASS button to return to the Compass Outside Temperature Audio Information ECO screen whenever the 041035449 current display is not the Compass Outside Temperature Audio Information ECO screen EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e RIGHT Arrow Button Push and release the RIGHT arrow button gt when prompted by the EVIC to Reset Main Menu features with a reset capability or to change Personal Settings e DOWN Arrow Button Push and release the DOWN arrow button V when prompted by the EVIC to step through Vehicle Info submenu or stored system warn ing messages or Personal Settings features Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Low Tire Pressure e Low Fuel e Service TPM Sys
469. tch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Push the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed push the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583 CAUTION WARNING Continued explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks they are e mission shifting occurring mounted in the front and the rear NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use WARNING both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle Always use an appropriately rated Fast spinning tires can be
470. tem refer to Tire Pressure Monitor ing System in Starting and Operating Damaged Key Key in Ignition Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Key Fob Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmission ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 e Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle in Motion manual transmission Door Open with vehicle graphic showing which door is open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Gate Open with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate back door open and a single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating for further information Oil Change Required with a single chime ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature push and release the MENU button once for each step A step from the last item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed The following features are in the Main menu Compass Outside Temperature and ECO display Digital Speedometer Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty Tire Pressure If Equipped
471. tem fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors ee STARTING AND OPERATING 535 NOTE e If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size IH SEE ear WOES ald Me aisemhly de anes OE spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS when swapped with a low pressure road tire In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition switch cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a chime to sound a LOW TIRE message to appear in the EVIC and the graphic display will still show the Inflate to XX message and the low tire pressure value flashing Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the ti
472. terference received Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped including interference that may cause undesired op Grasp the half door window and pull upward eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment DOORS CAUTION Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior Upper Half Door Window ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and line up the pins with the pockets in the lower door 2 Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated Front Door Removal WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the 0358001792 Door Removal Warning Label 1 Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only 2 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver NOTE The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Hinge Pin Screw 3 Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instru ment panel by pushing the tab
473. that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or Brake pedal pulsations These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires Modifi Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just cation may result in degraded ABS performance Continued 484 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The amber Anti Lock Brake Warning Light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake sy
474. the 12 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 rubber hood bumpers Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 13 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 1 Raise the windshield 2 Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Windshield And Remov ing Side Bars earlier in this section 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 036301724 036301723 e Reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 4 Tighten all side bar attachment bolts 3 Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield frame e Install the top two hex bolts 13 mm first then the lower side hex bolt 13 mm The lower side bolt will not align until the top two bolts are installed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the six black REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the wind shield A rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls EB the operation of the rear wiper washer function Rear Window
475. the DOWN button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Push and release the RIGHT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Push and release the COMPASS button to exit Digital Speedometer Shows the actual vehicle speed in mph or km h Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pushing and holding the RIGHT L7 arrow button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value
476. the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord 438 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one WARNING Continued brake fully applied The parking brake should al hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine The engine block heater cord is found under the hood ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle bundled in front of the battery tray especially on an incline WARNING CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch R
477. the mirror Power Mirror Switch Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 0304061662 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Vanity Mirrors Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors To use the mirrors rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward 030407997 Vanity Mirror UCONNECT PHONE IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio sys tem the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnec
478. the shoulder belt plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision Be To ae ease hoses Bis DIUI ie dee Duhon onde buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout If Equipped This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched NOTE If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seatback is fully latched If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be acti vated To reset this feature you must let all of the seat belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the r
479. the speedometer tachometer or any engine Maintaining Your Air Bag System related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec tion Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag Continued system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
480. the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 5 6 7 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position NOTE When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL N the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash 8 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in NEUTRAL 9 Release the brake pedal 10 11 12 13 14 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle Start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal Release the parking brake Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions and check that the vehicle operates normally WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 568 Road Tire Installation 577 E IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 568 W JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 578 ll WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Preparations For Jump Start SPECIFICATIONS s sse 569 Tinpano Protedii s eos oncexeeaa du Torque Specifications 00 569 E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 582 E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 571 E EMERGENCY
481. then automatically turn off Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released Front Fog Lights The front fog light switch is located on the multi function lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high detent to turn on the interior lighting beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate t
482. tion the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal function in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE If
483. tion is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly tr Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
484. tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse CAUTION quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys The TPMS has been optimized for the original tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety warning have been established for the tire size of reasons including the
485. to NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS anne a OD Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any system adds heat to the engine cooling system and time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the turning the A C off can help remove this heat vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum properly calibrated torque wrench heat the mode control to floor and the blower control Torque Specifications to high This allows the heater core to act as a b B supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut 8 from the engine cooling system Bolt Size Bolt Socket x 100 Ft Lbs 135 N m 1 2 x 20 19 mm You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If
486. to 4H or 4L The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position NOTE Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place Shifting while the front or rear wheels are spinning at different speeds can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed will be approximately three times four times for Rubicon models that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging Continued 456 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued the parking brake The transfer
487. tomatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmis sion into FIRST gear or REVERSE apply the park ing brake turn the engine OFF remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil Ignition Switch Positions dren should be warned not to touch the parking 1 LOCK brake brake pedal or the gear selector 2 ACC ACCESSORY Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or pe EUN in a location accessible to children A child could 4 START operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ize
488. ton Ejecting A CD a Push the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 the current selection Pushing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Push this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Push and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pushed The RW Reverse button operates in a similar manner AM FM Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Push this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Push the right SEEK button t
489. ton will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Push this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www siriusxm com or at www
490. ts load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire e XL Extra load or reinforced tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 503 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is
491. tside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with 030433897 Outside Rearview Mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your Continued another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located on the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position 030433056 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
492. ttended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death 021933670 Power Window Switches E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature Four Door Models The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull u
493. tton or push the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode 412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center
494. ture or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on Continued WARNING Continued the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmis sion shift the transmission into first gear And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL N Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized 558 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Towing Requirements Tires e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for proper inspection procedure When rep
495. u may screws two per side using a 130 Torx head driver carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brackets using a 130 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Instal lation in this section Installing The Soft Top Two Door Models NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models U A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Re moval in this section Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a 130 Torx h
496. ued 628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued can severely damage your brake system and or the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also impair its performance The proper type of brake damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master mE cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake Automatic Transmission If Equipped fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the Selection Of Lubricant air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this
497. un the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658 Heater Control Lamps 2 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp Rear Window Defog C ger and Rear Wash Wipe Soundbar Dome Lamp 912 Bulbs only available from authorized dealer 652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Mm Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Headlamps 2 H13 Front Park Turn Signal Lamps 2 3157NA Front Side Marker Lamps 2 168 Fog Lamps PSX24W Rear Stop Tail Turn Lamps 2 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp L E D Backup Lamps 2 3157 License Lamp 194 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Headlamp 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the fr
498. ut will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss UCONNECT 230 AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK 042040029 Uconnect 230 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left de
499. vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm NOTE Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung ers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED NOTE The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the doors or open any door Dome ON position extreme top position This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors i
500. will display Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position Elapsed time displays Minutes seconds After 59 minutes 59 seconds are reached Hours Min utes Seconds will be displayed Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and holding the RIGHT gt arrow button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START Vehicle Information Push and release the MENU button until Vehicle Infor mation displays in the EVIC Then push the DOWN arrow button to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure Transmission Temperature Automatic Transmis sion Only Shows the actual transmission fluid temperature Oil Life Remaining Automatic Oil Change Indica tor If Equipped Shows the oil life measured in percentage es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will display in the EVIC display for approximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means
501. with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor mal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door ee STARTING AND OPERATING 513 At least once a month e Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated e Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap Th
502. xempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and NOTE 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved ay reduce this ange by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 How To Use Remote Start WARNING All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e e e e e e e e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon Gear selector in PARK oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Doors closed Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled Hood closed Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters Hazard switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pushed could cause serious injury or death ion Key Olena R
503. y turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pushing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss INFO Button DISC Mode For MP3 WMA Play Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Push the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player an ipod or a microphone and utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No functi
504. y Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pushing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are avail able on the disc if equipped Audio Stream Repeatedly pushing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pushing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses Power Allows you to turn the power ON and OFF if equipped Lock Locks out rear remote controls if equipped e CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pushing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped Set Home Clock Pushing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then push and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults accordi
505. y can dam age the top material Also increased water pressure may force past the weather strips e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior Continued ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Care Of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions Never use a dry cloth to remove dust Instead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and down MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching It removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV pro tection to help prevent yellowing When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe wit
506. y times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caugh
507. y to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Driver And Passenger BeltAlert If Equipped amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The Belt Alert feature is active when ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON RUN position an intermit tent chime will signal for a few seconds If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON RUN E THIN
508. y want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between 3 and 22 In very cold weather EE if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B STARTING PROCEDURES i255 Ren 434 SB s bi RE ra eS RAE RPEFaG RE Kad Manual Transmission If Equipped 434 Downshifting ee cade EP eye EUR ted Automatic Transmission If Equipped 435 Reverse Shifting Normal Starting Gasoline Engine 435 M AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Extreme Cold Weather IF EQUIPPED 234 34 d 24 244 44025 b0e de 443 Below 22 F Or 30 C 004 435 Key Ignition Park Interlock 444 If Engine Fails To Start 0 436 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 445 Hl After Starting esc Year re ede e ed 437 O Five Speed Automatic Transmission E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 437 It Equipped ui asd e tene ite tensd 445 Gear Ranges l l 446 ll MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 438 430 STARTING AND OPERATING xe ll AUTOSTICK Operation ll FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC I OR ROCK TRAC Operating Instructions Precautions Shift Positions Shifting Procedure ll TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED ll AXLE LOCK
509. ystem If Equipped 531 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 543 General Information 4 536 IM VEHICLE LOADING cux ea ep mo Rot 544 E FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2x vcrc Re 537 Certification Label 0 0000 544 SOL ENP INE tes bet sae oO ee 537 W TRAILER TOWING 295190440 Ya En 546 Reformulated Gasoline 537 Common Towing Definitions 546 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 Trailer Hitch Classification 549 B RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings eee 550 Trailer And Tongue Weight 555 Towing Requirements 00 556 Towing NPS iced ota tews wes bus 560 MOTORHOME ETC rancnra rara a ea 562 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 562 Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models 1 4 arau aiaks e deen geal e is 563 434 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts ina locaton accessible t children A child could operate power windows other controls or move WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with ac
510. ystem is turned on 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Hill Decent Control HDC Indicator Light If Equipped White Telltale What It Means Light Hill Decent Control HDC Indicator Light This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control HDC feature is turned on The lamp 4 will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in e the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Blue Telltale Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light Blue Telltale Light What It Means High Beam Indicator Light This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction control sD lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on flash to pass scenario 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information It is located on the lower left part of the cluster below the speedometer Compass Display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRU

2014 Jeep Wrangler (includes Unlimited) Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents